Folks have used bells, beeper collars and tracking collars over the years but none of these devices are perfect for the average bird hunter." -- Steve Snell]]>
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust approximately 1-inch longer or 2.5-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
WHY A LEATHER DOG COLLAR?
Some dog trainers prefer leather collars when training their dogs because it won't pull on a dog's neck like nylon or other synthetic material when you're working with a dog. Leather has a different kind of friction. Leather doesn't spin on a dog the same as nylon. Doesn't tangle. Moves better on the dog's neck when cornering. The collar turns easier. Many dog owners like the look and feel of leather dog collars. Leather is one of the world's strongest materials and lasts a long time when taken care of properly. Leather is very durable. On the downside, you have to care for leather collars a little more, especially if you're working your dogs in water and the leather gets wet. You can clean a leather dog collar with a leather cleaner such as SADDLE SOAP. You also don't want a collar to dry out, so keep it clean and oiled with neatsfoot oil or another leather conditioner. If you have a dog with a light-colored coat like a yellow labrador retriever, don't put something on the collar that will stain the dog's neck!LEATHER COLLAR: BLACK HARDWARE
This Omnipet Leather Dog Collar has both a center o-ring AND a D-ring. Multiple rings are great for training your dog because you have plenty of options to attach leads, leashes, checkcords, and other training tools. For example, if you have your dog on a stake-out chain hooked to the D-ring, you can hook your leash to the center ring w/o unhooking from the stake until you have control over your dog. Center-ring collars are safety collars, and if worn loose enough, a dog can roll out of a center-ring collar if it gets caught on a fence or hung up. Leather Collar Features:COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust approximately 1-inch longer or 2.5-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
WHY A LEATHER DOG COLLAR?
Some dog trainers prefer leather collars when training their dogs because it won't pull on a dog's neck like nylon or other synthetic material when you're working with a dog. Leather has a different kind of friction. Leather doesn't spin on a dog the same as nylon. Doesn't tangle. Moves better on the dog's neck when cornering. The collar turns easier. Many dog owners like the look and feel of leather dog collars. Leather is one of the world's strongest materials and lasts a long time when taken care of properly. Leather is very durable. On the downside, you have to care for leather collars a little more, especially if you're working your dogs in water and the leather gets wet. You can clean a leather dog collar with a leather cleaner such as SADDLE SOAP. You also don't want a collar to dry out, so keep it clean and oiled with neatsfoot oil or another leather conditioner. If you have a dog with a light-colored coat like a yellow labrador retriever, don't put something on the collar that will stain the dog's neck!LEATHER COLLAR: BRASS HARDWARE
SOLID BRASS hardware which is pretty and strong. Brass not only looks good, but it's also good because it doesn't rust or turn. This collar hardware is made from solid brass, not a plated finish, so it won't wear off. Simply clean with BRASSO. The hardware matches the FREE BRASS ID NAME PLATE that comes with the collar. This Omnipet Leather Dog Collar has both a center o-ring AND a D-ring brass collar hardware. Multiple rings are great for training your dog because you have plenty of options to attach leads, leashes, checkcords, and other training tools. For example, if you have your dog on a stake out chain hooked to the brass D-ring, you can hook your leash to center ring w/o unhooking from the stake until you have control over your dog. Center-ring collars are safety collars, and if worn loose enough, a dog can roll out of a center-ring collar if it gets caught on a fence or hung up. Leather Collar Features:COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the third adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inches longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement (Smallest Size Only): (prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the third adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inch longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Two Sizes: (prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the end of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
Features:
Features:
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
Instructions for attaching name plates using rivets:
Most of our collars are pre-punched for ID plates. If your collar is not, or you are adding a second ID plate:- Use the ID plate to mark where it will be attached to the collar
- For leather collars, use a leather punch tool, ice pick, or hammer and nail to make the holes for the rivets
- For nylon collars, the holes should be melted using a soldering iron or a heated nail or ice pick
- Line the plate up on top of the holes and put the stud part of the rivet through from the bottom
- Put the crown over the stud and hammer it closed on a hard surface (concrete or steel)
- You should drive the 2 pieces together until the upper surface flattens out
- Your I.D. tag is now attached!
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
Instructions for attaching name plates using rivets:
Most of our collars are pre-punched for ID plates. If your collar is not, or you are adding a second ID plate:- Use the ID plate to mark where it will be attached to the collar
- For leather collars, use a leather punch tool, ice pick, or hammer and nail to make the holes for the rivets
- For nylon collars, the holes should be melted using a soldering iron or a heated nail or ice pick
- Line the plate up on top of the holes and put the stud part of the rivet through from the bottom
- Put the crown over the stud and hammer it closed on a hard surface (concrete or steel)
- You should drive the 2 pieces together until the upper surface flattens out
- Your I.D. tag is now attached!
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
Instructions for attaching name plates using rivets:
Most of our collars are pre-punched for ID plates. If your collar is not, or you are adding a second ID plate:- Use the ID plate to mark where it will be attached to the collar
- For leather collars, use a leather punch tool, ice pick, or hammer and nail to make the holes for the rivets
- For nylon collars, the holes should be melted using a soldering iron or a heated nail or ice pick
- Line the plate up on top of the holes and put the stud part of the rivet through from the bottom
- Put the crown over the stud and hammer it closed on a hard surface (concrete or steel)
- You should drive the 2 pieces together until the upper surface flattens out
- Your I.D. tag is now attached!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the two mounting-plate screws and the mounting plate from the collar.
- Remove the collar strap.
- Remove the rubber cover from the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Remove the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Attach the VHF antenna connector with the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Place the rubber cover over the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Replace the collar strap.
- Reattach the mounting plate with the two mounting-plate screws.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
4690]]>
4688]]>
4689]]>
10252]]>
10347]]>
10362]]>
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the two mounting-plate screws and the mounting plate from the collar.
- Remove the collar strap.
- Remove the rubber cover from the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Remove the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Attach the VHF antenna connector with the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Place the rubber cover over the VHF antenna-connector screw.
- Replace the collar strap.
- Reattach the mounting plate with the two mounting-plate screws.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 12" and 14" Sizes: (prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust approximately 1-inch longer or 2.5-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
WHY A LEATHER DOG COLLAR?
Some dog trainers prefer leather collars when training their dogs because it won't pull on a dog's neck like nylon or other synthetic material when you're working with a dog. Leather has a different kind of friction. Leather doesn't spin on a dog the same as nylon. Doesn't tangle. Moves better on the dog's neck when cornering. The collar turns easier. Many dog owners like the look and feel of leather dog collars. Leather is one of the world's strongest materials and lasts a long time when taken care of properly. Leather is very durable. On the downside, you have to care for leather collars a little more, especially if you're working your dogs in water and the leather gets wet. You can clean a leather dog collar with a leather cleaner such as SADDLE SOAP. You also don't want a collar to dry out, so keep it clean and oiled with neatsfoot oil or another leather conditioner. If you have a dog with a light-colored coat like a yellow labrador retriever, don't put something on the collar that will stain the dog's neck!LEATHER COLLAR: BRASS HARDWARE
SOLID BRASS hardware which is pretty and strong. Brass not only looks good, but it's also good because it doesn't rust or turn. This collar hardware is made from solid brass, not a plated finish, so it won't wear off. Simply clean with BRASSO. The hardware matches the FREE BRASS ID NAME PLATE that comes with the collar. This Omnipet Leather Dog Collar has both a center o-ring AND a D-ring brass collar hardware. Multiple rings are great for training your dog because you have plenty of options to attach leads, leashes, checkcords, and other training tools. For example, if you have your dog on a stake out chain hooked to the brass D-ring, you can hook your leash to center ring w/o unhooking from the stake until you have control over your dog. Center-ring collars are safety collars, and if worn loose enough, a dog can roll out of a center-ring collar if it gets caught on a fence or hung up. Leather Collar Features:COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the third adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inches longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the third adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inches longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the third adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inches longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
]]>(receiver not included)
]]>- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
6841]]>
6842]]>
- I had a customer last week who was having trouble with a Fly Trap. It wasn't catching the flies that were around his dogs. Come to find out, the trap that he was using was designed for house flies, but he had biting flies. When I told him that was the problem, his response was, "No, sir, a fly is a fly is a fly." Well, that's not true.
We generally break them down into "flies that bug you" and "flies that bite you." You identify the type of fly by their actions. So the first question to ask is, "Do they bug you, or do they bite you?"
There's the manure fly or house fly which will bug you. These are the typical pest fly.
Then there is the biting stable fly. They are after a blood meal. They must have a blood meal to lay their eggs. They're attracted to warm-blooded mammals -- they bite you, your dogs, your horses, and other animals on the lower extremities. They also bite the backs of your dogs' ears.
It's important to correctly identify your problem flies so that you can use the correct methods to lower their numbers and remove them from your property.
2. Use Fly Predators to stop the next generation of flies.
- Fly Predators will go after both the "biter" and "bother" flies. They hunt down fly larva and kill them before the larva can become an adult fly.
NOTE: Fly Predators will not go after water born flies including Horse flies, Deer flies and Black flies.
A Fly Predator is a member of the wasp family. It's a Hymenopteran wasp. It doesn't sting, bite, or get on people or animals. It spends its entire life looking for flies in the pupa stage of their life. When an adult fly lays an egg, the egg becomes a larva (or maggot), and then it pupates like a caterpillar into a cocoon. While in this pupa stage, the fly larva will stay in the puparium for 3-5 days until it comes out as an adult fly. Prior to the fly emerging, the fly predator locates the puparium case by sense of smell and uses it to lay its eggs, killing the fly larva before it becomes an adult fly.
There are three critical steps to using Fly Predators:
- Get started early -- The southernmost part of the United States should start using Fly Predators in February, including areas such as South Florida and Houston. Further north, they can be introduced later in the spring as temperatures start to rise. Typically we'll have everybody using Fly Predators by about the second or third week of May at the latest, including the Northeast. Generally, temperatures need to be above 40 degrees in the evening on a regular basis, and above 60 degrees during the day for pest flies to start hatching. Most people who fight flies go after them when they start to see them. They're not proactive, they're reactive. We're really better to start fighting flies before we see them. The reproduction potential of flies is scary. One female fly can make 1,000 flies in a 30-day period. If we knock them down while they're still in the pupa stage, we have fewer flies.
- Get the right amount of Fly Predators for the number of animals on your property -- Most folks need about 1,000 Fly Predators per month per large animal. Using the calculator on the Spalding website, you can figure out the correct number that you need based on the number of animals you have on your property. Our minimum order is 5,000 Fly Predators a month. That is enough to cover up to 15 dogs or 5 horses. I have 15 dogs, 2 horses, 3 cats, 2 goats, a couple of chickens, a few pigeons, and a few ducks, so I use 10,0000 predators a month. Having the right number of Fly Predators is crucial to controlling the pest flies on your property.
- Release the Fly Predators where the flies are breeding --
The most common mistake that people make is that they put Fly Predators out where they see flies. That's not where the flies are breeding. As a general rule, flies don't breed where they hang out.
Places where you see flies, like the barn or the kennel, is the "fly kitchen." We need to put the Fly Predators out in the "fly bedroom," where the pest flies are breeding -- around moist manure or moist rotting vegetation. Places that have a water trough, pond, stream, manure pile, or where you wash your kennels every day, wherever that effluent comes out on the ground, that's where your flies are breeding.
Fly Predators will travel up to 150 feet. I tell people that every time you put down a teaspoon or you shake a little out of the bag, you are starting a new colony of Fly Predators. That colony will work in a 150-foot circle.
I typically check the areas around my barn and kennel and where I find fresh manure piles I take a spoon and scoop out a small amount of Fly Predators to put near those piles. If you've got two manure piles 10 feet apart, put some right between them. You also have to think about places you might have a water leak, like around a water trough or around some nasty place that's moist and has manure. That's where you need to get the Fly Predators located. It's not required that the Fly Predators actually be placed on the manure or near the wet areas, they just need to be close to them.
3. Use odor control so no more flies are attracted to where your animals stay.
- Just like a dog can smell a quail and we can't, a fly can smell stuff we can't. The one thing we also tell people is if you have flies congregating, they're coming there because that area smells good to them. We always suggest that you use odor control to keep your place from smelling good to a fly. And that not only smells good to you, but it doesn't smell good to a fly and he won't be coming around as much.
You see flies congregating at the bottom of stalls. That's where they're roosting. They're doing that because of the urine smell. But if you spray odor control on there and you get that urine smell out of there, they won't be nearly as attracted to it.
That's where Bye-Bye Odor comes into play. Bye Bye Odor is a specially formulated mixture of bacteria designed to break down odor-causing waste from your pet. The 4 different bacterial strains each have a preferred substrate (the odor-producing compounds that they consume): one is best on starches, one best on fats, one on proteins, and all are good on sugars. Similar microbes are used in every modern sewage treatment plant to reduce the solids and smell. The Bye Bye Odor microbe recipe is optimized to be better at reducing all the different smell-producing compounds.
We want flies to be attracted to somewhere other than our barns, kennels, and homes. We do this by making our environment not good for flies.
If you didn't get started early on fly prevention, get started now.
If you waited until you actually started seeing flies and are now covered up with adult flies, you have to fight them two ways. You have stop the flies that are breeding using Fly Predators. You may need to use your double-up bonus shipment right off the bat, or in extreme situations even triple the normal number to get started. It will take the extra Fly Predators to get ahead of the flies that are creating thousands and thousands of flies each month. Then you need to go after all the adult flies with traps. You've got to hit them hard and fast. You'll start to see a decrease in flies that will gradually get better over a month or two. Remember -- next spring if you get started early you won't have to fight as hard!]]>27 lbs. to 50 lbs. -- 1 Tablet Twice Daily
51 lbs. to 99 lbs. -- 2 Tablets Twice Daily
100 lbs. & up -- 3 Tablets Twice Daily 60 chewable tablets per bottle. For Dog use only. Do not feed to cats.
A Potential Alternative to Rimadyl Natural White Willow vs. Rimadyl White Willow Bark is a natural alternative to Pfizer’s Carprofen, marketed as Rimadyl. University of Maryland Medical Center: White willow bark is a tree native to Europe and Asia, and the name "White Willow" comes from the color of the leaves, which are covered with fine white hairs. Its use dates back to the time of Hippocrates (400 BC) when patients were advised to chew on the bark to reduce fever and inflammation. Willow bark has been used throughout the centuries in China and Europe, and continues to be used today for the treatment of pain (particularly lower back pain and osteoarthritis), headache, and inflammatory conditions such as bursitis and tendinitis. The bark of White Willow contains salicin which is a chemical similar to aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid) and is thought to be responsible for the pain-relieving and anti-inflammatory effects of the herb. In the 1800s, salicin was used to develop aspirin. The German company Bayer eventually created a synthetic, less harsh derivative of salicylic acid, called acetylsalicylic acid (ASA), and mass-produced it under the name "aspirin." Despite this, aspirin is still known for stomach irritation and blood thinning. Researchers have also suggested that willow bark is more effective than aspirin because of other active compounds found in the bark but not the drug. Animal research at Cairo University compared a willow bark extract to acetylsalicylic acid (ASA) and found that a willow bark extract was as effective as aspirin in reducing inflamma-tion, even though the salicin content was lower than an equivalent dose of acetylsalicylic acid (ASA). Researchers believe that salicin, the chemical found in willow bark, is responsible for the bark's effects and studies have also identified several other components of willow bark which have antioxidant, fever-reducing, antiseptic, and immune-boosting properties. Some studies have shown willow is as effective as aspirin for reducing pain and inflammation (but not fever) at a much lower dose than aspirin. While as effective as aspirin, willow bark’s effect has been found to last longer than aspirin even though it may take longer to kick in. A Potential Alternative to Rimadyl: Aspirin-Free, Mendota Pet Aches & Discomfort for dogs is scientifically formulated with the all-natural White Willow herb to reduce pain and inflammation. Aches & Discomfort is as effective as aspirin, however, White Willow does not cause stomach upset or liver damage, nor will it thin your dog's blood like aspirin (which can lead to excessive internal and external bleeding). Mendota Pet Aches & Discomfort formulation includes Yucca -- a natural herb used for inflammation and pain control that actually blocks the release of toxins from the intestines. Pharmaceutical grade MSM is added to improve connective tissues, allow cells to retain their elasticity, reduce swelling, and to help ensure faster recovery. Possible Side Effects: white willow bark can safely be taken long-term at recommended doses. Higher than recommended doses of this herb may cause stomach upset or nausea. -- Tim Fisher, CEO / Founder, RETRIEVE HEALTH
Characteristics:]]>The ACME "Silent" Dog Whistle is precision-engineered to produce a range of fundamental frequencies between 5,400 Hz and 12,800 Hz. Although at this level the whistle is insignificant to human hearing, a dog, whose ears are far more sensitive to high frequencies, will instantly become more alert to the sound of this whistle than to any other, even one of louder and lower pitch. Distance: This whistle is effective up to two miles, subject to weather conditions, and the abilities of the dog and trainer. Determination of Note: Always use the same note for the same command. Adjustable Sleeve: Screws in to raise and out to lower the frequency. Stop Screw: Tighten to lock selected frequency. Pitch Register: It is recommended that graduation #2 be used for close work, and #3 and #4 for distance. How to Commence: Keep your commands as short and simple as possible. Dogs' hearing is of a very wonderful nature, so much that they can hear sounds quite inaudible to the human ear. Their sense of smell is also particularly keen and acute, and the most vital of their senses. It is also believed that they can reason, although this is not recognized in a general way, and more attention is being given now to this important subject than ever before. In the following instructions, where the human voice is mentioned, the silent whistle, with a predetermined pitch already set, can be substituted for the verbal command. Your dog will readily distinguish between long, short and multiple whistle commands. This will be particularly appropriate when working over distance. Commence training the dog not later than six months of age –- five months is a good time to start. They are full of pep and vigor then and with just that frolic of energetic puppyhood which makes training them so interesting. The following words of command fully explain themselves and should be used when training your companion: Sit, or Sit Down, Come, Come Here, Lie, Lie Down, Heel, Heel Up, Seek, Go Back, Go Round, Stop, Car, Danger, Don't Go, Fetch. Always use identically the same word or words for a given command – this is important as it is less confusing to the dog. The Three Axioms: The three axioms in training are kindness, perseverance, and patience. Make it a steadfast rule never to lose your temper –- endeavor to keep in mind that the dog must first understand in his own mind what it is that you require of him before he can begin to accomplish it. Do not hurry his lessons, complete one lesson before commencing another, and never beat or thrash him. Endeavor to get him to have implicit faith and trust in you; on no occasion forget to reward him for obedience. Show him by example and repetition what you require of him, and after he understands one or two lessons, he will quickly respond to succeeding ones, and then your worst trouble will be over. Sit (Sit Down): Press the dog's haunches into a sitting position, using the word Sit and move backward a few paces. If he rises put him back to his original position, and reward him with a tit-bit when he sits a short time. Gradually increase the time of sitting until he becomes obedient to the command. Come (Come Here): Give the command Come and reward him. Repeat until he becomes proficient. This is one of the easiest lessons to teach him. Lie (Lie Down): Press the dog gently but firmly into a prone position, making sure that his forepaws are drawn outwards, and at the same time using the word Down, withdraw the hands, and if he endeavors to rise up repeat the operation, continually using the word Down until he remains, then reward him and use such words as Good Dog, Clever Dog. Do not continue this lesson too long to commence with, and never longer than fifteen minutes. Puppies tire quickly without variety. Heel (Heel Up): Firstly keep a few tit-bits in your left hand jacket pocket. Call the dog by his name or use one blast of a whistle or both -– the call and then the whistle immediately after. Reward him on your left-hand side with your left hand, the idea being to have him at your left heel, thus leaving your right hand free. Never on any occasion thrash the dog for disobeying this command, otherwise, he will associate the thrashing with coming to heel. Seek: Procure a hard rubber ball of a size suitable for the dog to carry and throw it out a short distance into growing grass where the ball will be hidden. Keep the dog by your side until you give the command Seek. Allow the dog to nose about for the ball, but don't move from your position yourself. Shortly the dog will find the ball which he will immediately start to play with or carry to his kennel. Now you must give the command to Come and gently take the ball from him. Never permit him to go off with the ball, but to deliver it into your hand without dropping it. The first time he does this reward him well. Further, he must not be allowed to seek the ball until you give him the command to do so. When he has become an expert at seeking, order him to Sit and hide the ball a short distance away (never allow him to leave his position) and give him the command to Seek. Should he appear at a loss to understand what is required, proceed to look for the ball yourself, using the word Seek occasionally. After a few lessons, he will quickly deduce what you desire of him. When teaching this lesson do not use sticks or hard substances, as these invariably result in making the dog hard-mouthed, a condition carefully to be avoided. Never allow the dog to go after or carry stones if you wish him to have good teeth. Go Back: Secure the dog's attention by showing him the ball and place it where he can see it; walk away from it, with the dog at your heel, say a distance of fifteen yards; stop and face the way you came using the command Go Back. At first, he will fail to understand the order, so commence to go back slowly yourself always speaking the words Go Back. When you arrive at the place where you left the ball, pick it up and show it to the dog, replace it and again walk forward. Repeat until the dog goes back by himself to where the ball lies, allow him to bring the ball to you and reward him well. After he has learned this lesson thoroughly, the same procedure may be taught him to Go Round, the only difference being that he goes round in a half-circle, now of the right and now on the left. Stop: This next lesson requires a check cord: Throw the ball out and thereafter give the word to Seek. As he goes off, and when about half-way to the object, give the command Stop in a sharp and firm voice -– halting him at that distance by means of the check cord; then order him to Lie Down, retrieve the ball yourself, and repeat the procedure until the dog stops at the word of command. This lesson requires considerable repetition and frequent rewards. Fetch: Toss the ball a short distance keeping the dog at your side until you give the command Fetch, Fetch It. Do not leave your position, but have the dog bring the ball right up to your hand. When he does so reward him well. (See lesson explaining Seek). DANGER CALLS: Car Danger: Have the dog accompany you for a walk along a road where vehicles pass not too frequently, keeping him at your left heel. If he attempts to run after a car stop him abruptly by means of the check cord, using the word Danger. Repeat until he keeps by your side without checking. Don't Go: This is a very useful command, and a lesson generally learned without difficulty. Have a friend call the dog to him, and as he starts to walk or run towards him, give the command Don't Go, giving him a tit-bit. Should the dog persist in going towards the friend, bring him back to his original position, and repeat the lesson until the dog refuses to move from your side, notwithstanding frequent coaxing and tempting.
These are for our retail customers ONLY. No dealers. Not for resale. Thanks!
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
Instructions for attaching name plates using rivets:
Most of our collars are pre-punched for ID plates. If your collar is not, or you are adding a second ID plate:- Use the ID plate to mark where it will be attached to the collar
- For leather collars, use a leather punch tool, ice pick, or hammer and nail to make the holes for the rivets
- For nylon collars, the holes should be melted using a soldering iron or a heated nail or ice pick
- Line the plate up on top of the holes and put the stud part of the rivet through from the bottom
- Put the crown over the stud and hammer it closed on a hard surface (concrete or steel)
- You should drive the 2 pieces together until the upper surface flattens out
- Your I.D. tag is now attached!
Click here for BULK TAGS at a discount
]]>Overall Length: 7"
Height: 5.25"
Weight: 1.6 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Blued Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering pistols and/or blanks. Limited Lifetime Warranty In addition to offering repair and service, Alfa-Proj warrants to the original purchaser that the product is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. Damage due to abuse, misuse, neglect, or unauthorized adjustments or modifications made or attempted by anyone other than the stated factory repair service is excluded from this warranty. The Lifetime Service Policy covers functional defects. Alfa-Proj will repair or replace, at its option, any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship. The conditions of this warranty are twofold: First, the purchaser must return the warranty card with proof of retail purchase to: Elite Custom Guns, 2522 Tranquil Way, Sevierville, TN 37876-0170 within thirty days of purchase. Please include a copy of your purchase receipt. Second, the purchaser must notify Elite Custom Guns service department, in writing or by e-mail (elitecustomguns@gmail.com), stating the difficulty experienced and the date and place of original purchase. Excluded from this warranty are malfunctions caused by misuse or abuse of the starter revolver, damage due to lack of proper cleaning and maintenance, unauthorized modification, adjustments or repairs, shipping damages, careless handling, normal wear and tear, and defective or improperly loaded ammunition and corrosion. Alfa-Proj's responsibility under this warranty is limited to the repair or replacement of the revolver. Responsibility or liability for damage to property other than the revolver, personal injury or death, or consequential damages is SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED.]]>
On systems that use a toggle switch to change collar selections, I always keep the toggle switch on the "hot" dog that will likely need to be corrected first. If I have to correct the "cool" dog then I know that I must first change the toggle switch before I correct the dog. After I am done correcting the "cool" dog I always put the switch back on the "hot" dog. This way I always know which dog the switch is set on without having to look at the transmitter. Another problem with multi-dog units is that most times your dogs will need different levels for the exact same behavior (say not coming when called -- dog one might need a 3 while dog two only needs a 1).
Most multi-dog units use the same intensity level selector dial for both dogs. That means if you have your collar set on a high level for your "tough" dog, you will need to lower the level before you correct your "sensitive" dog.
I tend to keep my multi-dog collars set on lower levels and I raise them as needed. When I am done with the high-level correction, I immediately lower the stimulation level. I would rather under stimulate a dog that requires a high level than overstimulate a dog that needs a low level. I also like to know what level I am on at all times so I always go back to my preset level when I am done with a higher level correction.
Top 33 Most Popular Multi-dog Collars:
- Garmin Sport PRO 2-dog
- Garmin Sport PRO 3-dog
- SportDOG SD-425X 2-dog
- Dogtra T&B DUAL 2-dog (ecollar + beeper)
- Garmin PRO 70 3-dog
- Garmin PRO 550 2-dog
- Garmin PRO 70 2-dog
- SportDOG SD-425X 3-dog
- Garmin PRO 70 6-dog
- Garmin PRO 550 3-dog
- SportDOG SD-825X 2-dog
- SportDOG SD-875 2-dog
- Garmin Delta SE 2-dog
- Dogtra EDGE 4-dog
- Garmin PRO 70 4-dog
- Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 2-dog
- Dogtra 2702 T&B 2-dog (ecollar + beeper)
- Dogtra 3502X 2-dog
- SportDOG SD-575 2-dog
- Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 6-dog
- Dogtra EDGE 3-dog
- Dogtra 1902S 2-dog
- DT Systems DD700 2-dog
- SportDOG SD-875 3-dog
- SportDOG SD-825X 3-dog
- Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 3-dog
- Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 4-dog
- SportDOG SD-1825X 2-dog
- Dogtra 282C 2-dog
- DT Systems H2O 1850 PLUS 2-dog (ecollar + beeper)
- Dogtra EDGE 2-dog
- E-Collar Technologies ET-302A MINI 2-dog
- Dogtra 202C 2-dog
(updated twice daily)
"a" = Backordered with the manufacturer. ETA unknown.]]>
INSTRUCTIONS for Production to update this list:
- FIND: showallproducts (can take a little while to load)
- Select and COPY all IDs
- Click the CONTROLS button
- Locate “Edit by ID,” type “blocked” in the search bar and click EDIT
- Find the field “all-product-ids” and DELETE any existing IDs
- PASTE the IDs you copied in step 2 into “all-product-ids”
Alpha 300
Alpha 200i
Alpha 200
Alpha 100
Astro 430
Astro 320
DriveTrack 71
DriveTrack 70
Rino 610, 650, and 655t
Oregon series
Dakota series
GPSMAP 62 series
eTrex 10, 20, and 30]]>
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
Handheld
ALPHA Screens
Garmin ALPHA with TT10 GPS + Ecollar Reviewed:
July 31, 2012
Rated Stars
STARKVILLE, MS
By Steve Snell
By Steve Snell
Creating this proper association is key.
Most of my dogs will "back" the sound of a beeper. I have a 10 year old brittany named Jet that fully understands what beepers mean. She will "back" the sound of a beeper going off in "point" mode just like she would honor a dog on point that she can see. My dogs know what it means when a beeper kicks in to "point mode" and many will stop on it before they ever see the dog on point. Several times in the field she has backed a dog's beeper at distances that I could not hear -- it's really cool to watch.How I start beeper introduction...
You never, ever want to start out a dog wearing the beeper. Many dogs will do fine, but there is no reason to take the chance of it scaring your dog. Go slow and you can get him used to and comfortable with the sound. I introduce beepers a little like the introduction to gun fire. Click here to read our Intro to Gunfire article. I get a few training birds (quail or pigeons) and put them out in the field. I carry the beeper in my hand and turn it on. I place my palm over the speaker horn to control the volume. As the dog gets some distance away from me, I allow the beeper to run at full volume in "run mode" - It will beep once every 4 to 8 seconds depending on the model. As he comes up on the birds and points, I set the beeper down on the ground a distance away from him so that it goes into point mode. As long as he has heard it a few times before it goes into point mode, it should not cause any issues.Start at a young age
I normally introduce beepers at a young age so the dog is not steady. I move in to flush the birds, and once we flush the birds I let the dog chase and I go pick the beeper up. The trick here is to closely watch the dog for any reaction. If he pays any attention to the beeper, you need to back up and slow down. Give your dog multiple exposures to beepers and birds and he'll get the idea. If things are going well, we will move to putting the beeper on him. If needed, we will lower the volume of the beeper when we put it on the dog. You can control the volume of the beeper by covering the speaker horn with Duct tape. Depending on the dog's sensitivity level, I may cover 75% of the speaker horn. This will drastically lower the sound. You can also fill the speaker horn with cotton before you tape it if you need to make it really quiet. Some dogs need this, some do not.As long as the dog has the proper association with the sound of a beeper, it will go pretty fast.
Some folks will introduce the beeper around the house or kennel during feeding time.
You can do this and it should not cause any issues, but it will not give the correct association. If you go this route, be sure to start with the beeper in your hand so you can control the volume and the mode (run or point) and maintain control over the situation.Folks that want to run their dog in "Point Mode Only" need to be especially careful.
"Point Mode Only" means that the beeper only goes off when the dog is stopped. It goes from silent to full blown loud after your dog has been stopped for a few seconds. Be sure to follow the bird introduction method with the beeper so that your dog understands that the beeper is a GOOD thing. If the first time your dog hears the beeper is when he is on point, it can scare him to the point of causing him to "blink" birds. This is a major problem that you want to avoid.Running a remote training collar with beeper
Folks that are running a remote training collar with remote control over the beeper collar need to make sure the dog is comfortable with ALL of the sounds that the beeper will make while it is on the dog. Most remote beepers have a "locate" feature and many allow you to change sounds or modes from the handheld transmitter. My dad had a brittany named Star that never got used to the "locate" sound that the Tri-Tronics beeper makes. We screwed up and did not introduce her to it correctly and she never liked the sound. The regular beeping and the point mode beeping didn't bother her, but the locate sound would make her stop what she was doing and quickly run back to his side. Work with your dog on all of these sounds in multiple areas and situations so that he is prepared for the sounds that your beeper collar will make. Just like proper Gun Fire conditioning, getting your dog comfortable with the sounds and situations that a beeper collar will create will save you a good bit of training heartbreak down the road. ]]>- Picking a Puppy & Pedigree
- Akin's Answers - What to do with my puppy?
- Fun Bumpers - "Hup Hups", retrieves on land
- Akin's Answers - What do I do with my puppy when I come home?
- Introduction to Water
- Introduction to Covers & Decoys
- Introduction to Birds
- Akin's Answers - Puppy Teeth?
- Introduction to Kennel
- Akin's Answers - When should formal training begin?
- Introduction to Formal Training
- Formal Training - Tools
- Formal Training - Obedience
- Putting on Checkcord
- Heel
- Sit/Stay & Here
- Sit/Stay & Here with a more advanced dog
- Kennel
- E-Collar Conditioning
- Putting on E-Collar
- Heel & Here
- Introduction to Gunfire
- Introduction to Force Fetch
- Teaching Force Fetch
- Akin's Answers - Can I continue to throw retrieves during Force Fetch?
- Force Fetch with a more advanced dog
- Force Fetch from the ground
- Walking Fetch
- Introduction to Formal Marking
- Steady - Singles & Doubles
- Diversions
- Diversions - with a less advanced dog
- Akin's Answers - Socialize to your hunting environment
- Adding Distance
- Adding Birds
- Adding the Gun
- Akin's Answers - Making exceptions with friends and family
- Adding Water
- Akin's Answers - Teaching your dog his place
- Steadying - From the duck blind
- Akin's Answers - Taking the right steps on your pup's first few hunts
- Steadying - From the pit
- Akin's Answers - Pup's first hunt
- Good Luck!
Disc 2 Chapters: Chapter One: Preparation for the Advanced Duck Dog
- Terms of the Game
- Akins Answers - Tools needed
- Fun Drills
- Training Grounds
- Akins Answers - 3 handed cast
- Intro to Back Cast and Over Cast
- Preparation for the Land T
- E-Collar prep
- Force to a Pile & Center Line
- Stop en Route
- Mini T
- Akins Answers - Land T
- Land T
- Akins Answers - What is "De-Cheat?"
- "De-Cheat" - Phase One of "De-Cheat"
- Akins Answers - Phase Two of "De-Cheat"
- Phase Two of "De-Cheat"
- Water Force
- Water T
- Akins Answers - 5 point drill
- 5 Point Drill
- In Close
Disc 3 Chapters: Preface to DDB III Chapter One: Building the 9 Point and Pattern Water Blinds
- Akin's 9 Point Prep
- 9 Point Drill
- Akin's Answers - Cold Water
- Akin's Pattern Water Blind Prep
- Pattern Water BLinds
- Akin's Log Drill
- Akin's 7 Point Prep
- 7 Point Water Drill
- 7 Point with white bumpers
- 7 Point with orange bumpers
- Akin's Answer - Casting Technique
- 5 Day Land Pattern BLinds
- Akin's Answers
- Difference in Pattern and Cold BLinds
- Advanced Land Pattern Blinds
- Akin's Answers - The Stadium
- DDB III In Close
About Chris Akin Chris Akin is a duck hunter. His entire career has been built on a love for duck hunting. It wasn't long after high school that Chris had figured a way to make a living as close to duck hunting as possible. It was dogs. He began to understand that he had a natural talent to train retrievers and with time he would develop into one of the very best of our time. Chris' training style is what many might call unconventional. Unlike just about every other great of our time, Chris' training doesn't fall into a "Rex Carr or Farmer/Aycock" theory. It's all based on a huge number of retrievers trained. It's a safe argument to say that at 41 years of age Chris Akin may have trained more retrievers than anyone in history. With right under 4000 retrievers going through Webb Footed Kennels over the last 20 plus years there are very few that can claim seeing and actually handling anywhere close to as many retrievers as Chris has. Chris' style is based on a retriever's strengths as his style uses a "less-pressure" approach. You'll find that Chris uses more "attaboys" and "attagirls" than almost any trainer in the business. Chris, his wife Janet and children Kristen and Clay live about 100 yards west of Webb Footed Kennels in the northeastern tip of Arkansas in a small town called Bono. He's well known for training all 7 days of every week, so don't be afraid to stop by and ask questions any time. ]]>
SIZE CHART
X-Small -- 15" neck, 22" chestSmall -- 16" neck, 24" chest
Medium -- 17" neck, 26" chest
Large -- 18" neck, 28" chest
X-Large -- 19" neck, 31" chest
XX-Large -- 20" neck, 33" chest
XXX-Large -- 21" neck, 35" chest
How to Measure Your Dog for a Neoprene Dog Vest
It's really important to get the correct fit for your vest. We want it snug on the dog's chest so that it retains body heat while your dogs in the water, but not so tight that it makes running or swimming difficult. HOW TO MEASURE -- To measure your dog you are going to need either a seamstress tape or you can use any sort of piece of string, something you can wrap around the dog and then measure it with a tape measure, or you can even use a leash to get the correct measurement and then measure that off with a tape measure. MEASURE ON A TABLE -- I like to measure the dog standing up on a table. This way I'm standing up, I'm comfortable, and I've got the dog where I can position him correctly. There are two measurements you need when you are sizing your dog for a vest: the chest measurement and then the neck measurement. NECK MEASUREMENT -- The neck measurement is taken lower on the dog's neck than you would measure for a dog collar. A dog collar sits more toward the middle or higher up on the neck, but the vest doesn't go up that high, so take the measurement lower on the neck -- a little bit above the shoulders. CHEST MEASUREMENT -- Have your dog stand. The chest measurement is taken from the deepest part of the chest -- typically closer to behind the front legs. Remember, when you're measuring your dog, the most important size is the chest measurement. It's got to fit the chest tight. Everything else you can cut around, but if you're too small in the chest, you're not gonna be able to put it on your dog. If the neck measurement is off a little bit, you can trim it down to size.CUSTOMIZING TO FIT IS EASY
Dogs are all different shapes and sizes, so it's possible you may have to trim the neck and/or leg holes to get a perfect fit. BAR TACKS STOP FRAYING -- What's nice about these vests is that they have "bar tacks" sewn across the seams so you can customize the neck and leg holes for your dog. When you use scissors to cut the hole larger, normally a seam would just rip and unravel on you. Instead, the bar tack is sewn perpendicular to the seam which stops the seams from shredding. TRIM THE LEG OPENINGS IF TOO TIGHT -- When I'm sizing a vest for my dog, I like to put her in the water first to find out when she's swimming if it's going to be too tight. Make sure that there is not a problem with her legs. CUSTOMIZE THE NECK -- You want the neck snug so it retains heat, but you also don't want to cut the neck opening too low, because it will scoop water as your dog swims. I prefer the neck up a little bit higher, but not where it's in the way. Also, have your dog sit in the vest. Sometimes a vest works fine from a standing position, but when she sits down it's pushing up against her, so we trim a little bit out of here to make that comfortable. There is about an inch between bar tacks, and when you cut you don't have to cut all the way to the next bar tack, but you may get a little fraying. Just customize it to fit your dog better.GET YOUR DOG ACCUSTOMED TO THE VEST
In the above video you can see that is the first time my lab, Flint, has worn any kind of vest. She's a little uncomfortable with it. She doesn't really grasp exactly what it is. You want to fit your dog's vest, and get them used to wearing it while training and working and swimming long before the opening day of the season. Give your dog plenty of time to move around in it, swim in it, sit on a stand or ladder, retrieve a few dummies, and just get used to it. A neoprene vest is just more gear that they're going to be using while we're duck hunting, so just like any other training, give them plenty of time in the vest BEFORE hunting.WHAT IF YOU NEED A VEST NOW AND YOU'RE NOT SURE ABOUT THE SIZE?
Some folks wait until the last minute, and realize they need it now! If you're in a hurry, or if it's late season and it's close to the time that you're gonna need a new vest, the last thing you want to do is get to the duck hole only to find that your new vest doesn't fit. Say you're in between sizes, or just not confident which size your dog really needs, then you may want to order two and try them both out. Return the one that doesn't fit. You only pay return shipping for the vest that didn't fit. If you order a vest that doesn't fit correctly, we will be glad to take it back or do an exchange for you. It's okay that you put it on the dog, but please don't cut or customize it until you're sure the chest fits just right. ]]>SIZE CHART
X-Small -- 15" neck, 22" chestSmall -- 16" neck, 24" chest
Medium -- 17" neck, 26" chest
Large -- 18" neck, 28" chest
X-Large -- 19" neck, 31" chest
XX-Large -- 20" neck, 33" chest
XXX-Large -- 21" neck, 35" chest
How to Measure Your Dog for a Neoprene Dog Vest
It's really important to get the correct fit for your vest. We want it snug on the dog's chest so that it retains body heat while your dogs in the water, but not so tight that it makes running or swimming difficult. HOW TO MEASURE -- To measure your dog you are going to need either a seamstress tape or you can use any sort of piece of string, something you can wrap around the dog and then measure it with a tape measure, or you can even use a leash to get the correct measurement and then measure that off with a tape measure. MEASURE ON A TABLE -- I like to measure the dog standing up on a table. This way I'm standing up, I'm comfortable, and I've got the dog where I can position him correctly. There are two measurements you need when you are sizing your dog for a vest: the chest measurement and then the neck measurement. NECK MEASUREMENT -- The neck measurement is taken lower on the dog's neck than you would measure for a dog collar. A dog collar sits more toward the middle or higher up on the neck, but the vest doesn't go up that high, so take the measurement lower on the neck -- a little bit above the shoulders. CHEST MEASUREMENT -- Have your dog stand. The chest measurement is taken from the deepest part of the chest -- typically closer to behind the front legs. Remember, when you're measuring your dog, the most important size is the chest measurement. It's got to fit the chest tight. Everything else you can cut around, but if you're too small in the chest, you're not gonna be able to put it on your dog. If the neck measurement is off a little bit, you can trim it down to size.CUSTOMIZING TO FIT IS EASY
Dogs are all different shapes and sizes, so it's possible you may have to trim the neck and/or leg holes to get a perfect fit. BAR TACKS STOP FRAYING -- What's nice about these vests is that they have "bar tacks" sewn across the seams so you can customize the neck and leg holes for your dog. When you use scissors to cut the hole larger, normally a seam would just rip and unravel on you. Instead, the bar tack is sewn perpendicular to the seam which stops the seams from shredding. TRIM THE LEG OPENINGS IF TOO TIGHT -- When I'm sizing a vest for my dog, I like to put her in the water first to find out when she's swimming if it's going to be too tight. Make sure that there is not a problem with her legs. CUSTOMIZE THE NECK -- You want the neck snug so it retains heat, but you also don't want to cut the neck opening too low, because it will scoop water as your dog swims. I prefer the neck up a little bit higher, but not where it's in the way. Also, have your dog sit in the vest. Sometimes a vest works fine from a standing position, but when she sits down it's pushing up against her, so we trim a little bit out of here to make that comfortable. There is about an inch between bar tacks, and when you cut you don't have to cut all the way to the next bar tack, but you may get a little fraying. Just customize it to fit your dog better.GET YOUR DOG ACCUSTOMED TO THE VEST
In the above video you can see that is the first time my lab, Flint, has worn any kind of vest. She's a little uncomfortable with it. She doesn't really grasp exactly what it is. You want to fit your dog's vest, and get them used to wearing it while training and working and swimming long before the opening day of the season. Give your dog plenty of time to move around in it, swim in it, sit on a stand or ladder, retrieve a few dummies, and just get used to it. A neoprene vest is just more gear that they're going to be using while we're duck hunting, so just like any other training, give them plenty of time in the vest BEFORE hunting.WHAT IF YOU NEED A VEST NOW AND YOU'RE NOT SURE ABOUT THE SIZE?
Some folks wait until the last minute, and realize they need it now! If you're in a hurry, or if it's late season and it's close to the time that you're gonna need a new vest, the last thing you want to do is get to the duck hole only to find that your new vest doesn't fit. Say you're in between sizes, or just not confident which size your dog really needs, then you may want to order two and try them both out. Return the one that doesn't fit. You only pay return shipping for the vest that didn't fit. If you order a vest that doesn't fit correctly, we will be glad to take it back or do an exchange for you. It's okay that you put it on the dog, but please don't cut or customize it until you're sure the chest fits just right. ]]>SIZE CHART
X-Small -- 15" neck, 22" chestSmall -- 16" neck, 24" chest
Medium -- 17" neck, 26" chest
Large -- 18" neck, 28" chest
X-Large -- 19" neck, 31" chest
XX-Large -- 20" neck, 33" chest
XXX-Large -- 21" neck, 35" chest
How to Measure Your Dog for a Neoprene Dog Vest
It's really important to get the correct fit for your vest. We want it snug on the dog's chest so that it retains body heat while your dogs in the water, but not so tight that it makes running or swimming difficult. HOW TO MEASURE -- To measure your dog you are going to need either a seamstress tape or you can use any sort of piece of string, something you can wrap around the dog and then measure it with a tape measure, or you can even use a leash to get the correct measurement and then measure that off with a tape measure. MEASURE ON A TABLE -- I like to measure the dog standing up on a table. This way I'm standing up, I'm comfortable, and I've got the dog where I can position him correctly. There are two measurements you need when you are sizing your dog for a vest: the chest measurement and then the neck measurement. NECK MEASUREMENT -- The neck measurement is taken lower on the dog's neck than you would measure for a dog collar. A dog collar sits more toward the middle or higher up on the neck, but the vest doesn't go up that high, so take the measurement lower on the neck -- a little bit above the shoulders. CHEST MEASUREMENT -- Have your dog stand. The chest measurement is taken from the deepest part of the chest -- typically closer to behind the front legs. Remember, when you're measuring your dog, the most important size is the chest measurement. It's got to fit the chest tight. Everything else you can cut around, but if you're too small in the chest, you're not gonna be able to put it on your dog. If the neck measurement is off a little bit, you can trim it down to size.CUSTOMIZING TO FIT IS EASY
Dogs are all different shapes and sizes, so it's possible you may have to trim the neck and/or leg holes to get a perfect fit. BAR TACKS STOP FRAYING -- What's nice about these vests is that they have "bar tacks" sewn across the seams so you can customize the neck and leg holes for your dog. When you use scissors to cut the hole larger, normally a seam would just rip and unravel on you. Instead, the bar tack is sewn perpendicular to the seam which stops the seams from shredding. TRIM THE LEG OPENINGS IF TOO TIGHT -- When I'm sizing a vest for my dog, I like to put her in the water first to find out when she's swimming if it's going to be too tight. Make sure that there is not a problem with her legs. CUSTOMIZE THE NECK -- You want the neck snug so it retains heat, but you also don't want to cut the neck opening too low, because it will scoop water as your dog swims. I prefer the neck up a little bit higher, but not where it's in the way. Also, have your dog sit in the vest. Sometimes a vest works fine from a standing position, but when she sits down it's pushing up against her, so we trim a little bit out of here to make that comfortable. There is about an inch between bar tacks, and when you cut you don't have to cut all the way to the next bar tack, but you may get a little fraying. Just customize it to fit your dog better.GET YOUR DOG ACCUSTOMED TO THE VEST
In the above video you can see that is the first time my lab, Flint, has worn any kind of vest. She's a little uncomfortable with it. She doesn't really grasp exactly what it is. You want to fit your dog's vest, and get them used to wearing it while training and working and swimming long before the opening day of the season. Give your dog plenty of time to move around in it, swim in it, sit on a stand or ladder, retrieve a few dummies, and just get used to it. A neoprene vest is just more gear that they're going to be using while we're duck hunting, so just like any other training, give them plenty of time in the vest BEFORE hunting.WHAT IF YOU NEED A VEST NOW AND YOU'RE NOT SURE ABOUT THE SIZE?
Some folks wait until the last minute, and realize they need it now! If you're in a hurry, or if it's late season and it's close to the time that you're gonna need a new vest, the last thing you want to do is get to the duck hole only to find that your new vest doesn't fit. Say you're in between sizes, or just not confident which size your dog really needs, then you may want to order two and try them both out. Return the one that doesn't fit. You only pay return shipping for the vest that didn't fit. If you order a vest that doesn't fit correctly, we will be glad to take it back or do an exchange for you. It's okay that you put it on the dog, but please don't cut or customize it until you're sure the chest fits just right. ]]>- Download and install the free BaseCamp program from the Garmin website
- Connect your Alpha or Astro handheld or Fenix 3 watch to your computer using the provided USB cable
- Power on your device, if needed
- Open up BaseCamp
- Wait for your device to be listed on the left side of the program
- Right-click on the folder (usually called Internal Storage) below your GPS Device
- Select Copy
- Right-click on My Collection
- Select Paste
- Wait for the data to finish transferring
- Right-click on the folder below device
- Select Eject
To restore your User Data to your device:
- Repeat steps 1-4 above
- Right-click on My Collection
- Select Copy
- Right-click on the folder (usually called Internal Storage) below your GPS Device
- Select Paste
- Repeat Steps 9-11 above
DVD usually ships the next business day.]]>
HOW OFTEN TO TRAIN
FRUSTRATED OWNERS / PROBLEM SOLVING
START USING ECOLLARS ON DAY 1
PUSH THE BUTTON A LOT
ECOLLAR CONDITIONING
HOW TO PUT COLLAR ON THE DOG
INTRODUCING ECOLLAR TO YOUR DOG
WHAT'S THE RIGHT LEVEL?
GETTING STARTED ON THE TRAINING
WHEN SHOULD MY DOG WEAR THE ECOLLAR?
TRAINING SEGMENTS INCLUDE
Retriev-R-Trainer Instructions
The Retriev-R-Trainer is a practical aid for training retrievers. Training dummies designed for the use with it can be power thrown two to three times farther than hand-thrown dummies. They are useful on land or water. Extra dummies can be used to throw doubles, triples, etc. The Retriev-R-Trainer uses blank power charges for throwing power. The accompanying report eliminates the need for a blank pistol.Maintenance:
User must thoroughly clean the barrel, chamber, and hinge areas with a good gun cleaning solvent after each use. Failure to properly maintain the RRT Launcher may result in serious injury or death. You may purchase the RRT Cleaning Kit to simplify this process. A small amount of gun oil applied to the hinge area after cleaning will help to ensure smooth operation. Cleaning of the chamber can be enhanced by using a .22 caliber wire brush. Also, thoroughly clean and dry the inside of the dummy tube after each launch to be certain that, prior to each time you launch the dummy from your launcher, it is free of debris both internally and externally. Failure to properly maintain the aluminum insert tube in your dummy may result in serious injury or death. A rubber "O" Ring in a grove near the outer end of the barrel provides a seal for the release gases of the power charge. This "O" Ring will wear causing some of the gases to escape, thereby reducing the flight distance of the dummy. Apply a thin coat of Vaseline, or any other lubricant safe for use on rubber components, to prevent drying and cracking of the o-ring. Replacement "O" Rings are available separately.Preparation for Firing:
Launching:
Firmly grasp the launcher handle in one hand with the thumb latch oriented toward the shoulder of the holding arm. The heel of the holding hand should be facing the thumb latch and your fingers should be wrapped firmly around the grip. Your thumb will be closest to the Pull Knob. Bend the elbow slightly and position the launcher about waist high and one foot from your body. Aim about 45° from the horizontal off to your side toward the target area. Pull the firing knob back to its fully extended position and release it to launch.
NOTE: NEVER DRY FIRE your Retriev-R-Trainer!
Cautions and Warnings:
Your RRT Launcher is not a firearm, but the same handling, care, and safety precautions must be exercised. Your Retriev-R-Trainer is provided with certain built-in safety features, but these are not substitutes for safe handling practices, which include the use of ear and eye protection as well as the use of heavy leather gloves.8-B: The Hounds shall be numbered consecutively as entered, starting with the number "1"...or wear color-coded collars. The colors to be used are red, white, blue, green, yellow, orange, black, pink, and silver. The Field Trial Secretary and his assistant, if any, shall be the only persons to record each number against the name of the corresponding hound....These 1" collars feature single-ply polyurethane coated nylon and are bright colored, highly visible, light, inexpensive, soil and odor resistant, water repellent and long lasting. Heavy gauge nickel plated hardware & capped rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
To ensure a perfect fit, measure your dog's neck before you order. Add 4-5 inches to dog's actual neck measurement to order the proper length collars on this page. If you want room for growth or a "loose" fit, add more. Measurement should be made near the middle of the dog's neck.
| Measurement Guide | |
|---|---|
| Collar Size | Neck Sizes |
| 17CS | 11" - 15" |
| 19CS | 13" - 17" |
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
8-B: The Hounds shall be numbered consecutively as entered, starting with the number "1"...or wear color-coded collars. The colors to be used are red, white, blue, green, yellow, orange, black, pink, and silver. The Field Trial Secretary and his assistant, if any, shall be the only persons to record each number against the name of the corresponding hound....The collars feature single-ply polyurethane coated nylon and are bright colored, highly visible, light, inexpensive, soil and odor resistant, water repellent and long lasting. Heavy gauge nickel plated hardware & capped rivets. Made in the USA.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
To ensure a perfect fit, measure your dog's neck before you order. Add 4-5 inches to dog's actual neck measurement to order the proper length collars on this page. If you want room for growth or a "loose" fit, add more. Measurement should be made near the middle of the dog's neck.
| Measurement Guide | |
|---|---|
| Collar Size | Neck Sizes |
| 17CS | 11" - 15" |
| 19CS | 13" - 17" |
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
Chapter 4 , Section 1: A club holding a licensed or member field trial shall offer prize ribbons or rosettes of the following colors in the four regular classes: First prize -- BlueThe collars feature single-ply polyurethane coated nylon and are bright colored, highly visible, light, inexpensive, soil and odor resistant, water repellent and long-lasting. Heavy gauge nickel-plated hardware & capped rivets. Made in the USA.
Second prize -- Red
Third prize -- Yellow
Fourth prize -- White
N.B.Q. -- Dark Green
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
To ensure a perfect fit, measure your dog's neck before you order. Add 4-5 inches to dog's actual neck measurement to order the proper length collars on this page. If you want room for growth or a "loose" fit, add more. Measurement should be made near the middle of the dog's neck.
| Measurement Guide | |
|---|---|
| Collar Size | Neck Sizes |
| 17CS | 11" - 15" |
| 19CS | 13" - 17" |
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
8-B: The Hounds shall be numbered consecutively as entered, starting with the number "1"...or wear color-coded collars. The colors to be used are red, white, blue, green, yellow, orange, black, pink, and silver. The Field Trial Secretary and his assistant, if any, shall be the only persons to record each number against the name of the corresponding hound....These 3/4" collars feature single-ply polyurethane coated nylon and are bright colored, highly visible, light, inexpensive, soil and odor resistant, water repellent and long-lasting. Heavy gauge nickel plated hardware & capped rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
To ensure a perfect fit, measure your dog's neck before you order. Add 4-5 inches to dog's actual neck measurement to order the proper length collars on this page. If you want room for growth or a "loose" fit, add more. Measurement should be made near the middle of the dog's neck.
| Measurement Guide | |
|---|---|
| Collar Size | Neck Sizes |
| 17CS | 11" - 15" |
| 19CS | 13" - 17" |
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
8-B: The Hounds shall be numbered consecutively as entered, starting with the number "1"...or wear color-coded collars. The colors to be used are red, white, blue, green, yellow, orange, black, pink, and silver. The Field Trial Secretary and his assistant, if any, shall be the only persons to record each number against the name of the corresponding hound....The collars feature single-ply polyurethane coated nylon and are bright colored, highly visible, light, inexpensive, soil and odor resistant, water repellent and long lasting. Heavy gauge nickel plated hardware & capped rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
To ensure a perfect fit, measure your dog's neck before you order. Add 4-5 inches to dog's actual neck measurement to order the proper length collars on this page. If you want room for growth or a "loose" fit, add more. Measurement should be made near the middle of the dog's neck.
| Measurement Guide | |
|---|---|
| Collar Size | Neck Sizes |
| 17CS | 11" - 15" |
| 19CS | 13" - 17" |
Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room.
Our tags will fit up to 4 lines of information.
The top and bottom lines are longer and will fit 20 letters. Lines 2 and 3 are shorter - fitting only 18. This is because of the placement of the rivets.
Our ID Plate machine can stamp the following characters:
How Beeper Collars Work
Beeper collars use a motion sensor to tell the hunter what your dog is doing. Most beeper collars can be adjusted to run / point mode - making one beep every 5 to 10 seconds while the dog is moving and then changing to a beep every second when the dog stops. They also have point mode only. This means the collar makes no sound while the dog is moving, but kicks into "point" mode when the dog stops.How to Select a Beeper Collar for You & Your Dog
To select the correct beeper collar for you and your dogs, you will need to look at your needs and physical requirements. It is very difficult to say there is a "perfect beeper collar" for everyone because there are many issues that go into play with selecting beeper collars. I am always searching for the best beeper to fit my needs and the correct combination of collars that will work best with my hunting dogs. Most beeper collars are separate units that you activate when you put the collar on the dog. It will run until you turn the collar off at the end of your hunt. Some beepers have remote controls that work in combination with an electronic training collar. The transmitter allows you to turn the beeper on and off as the cover changes or as your dog ranges out of your sight. See Combination Beeper / Training Collars. We also have a remote beeper that is not part of a training collar. The DT 809 Remote Beeper has a small "key chain" size transmitter that allows you to turn the beeper on and off or change modes from up to 250 yards.Beeper Collars -- Range
The first issue is range. Some beeper collars are louder than others. If you have big running bird dogs then you will need a louder beeper than someone using flushing dogs in a CRP field. Most folks confuse volume with range. Some beepers are loud, but the pitch that they produce does not carry as far as a lower pitch sound. Most of the beeper collar manufacturers will give you a stated range for their product. What they don't tell you is that this depends on several factors. This first is your hearing. Some folks have really good hearing and some do not. My hearing is still pretty good and I can pick up some of our beepers as far as 800 yards in the best situation (low wind and little cover). I can also hear some beeper collars better than my dad could. Generally, we lose the higher range of our hearing as we get older. We carry a couple of "low-toned" beepers. Some of our veteran bird hunters can hear them better than a high-pitched beeper collar. Low-Tone Baritone Beeper Collars: See the BTB 809 Remote Activated Baritone Beeper and the BTB 800 Baritone Beeper.Beeper Collars -- Factors Affecting Range
Wind noise is a major factor. No matter what anybody says, if the wind is blowing 40 to 50 mph, even the best beeper collar will be hard to hear. Cover and terrain also make a big difference. Sound will carry better in open, flat land. We quail hunt in an area with lots of gulleys and a dog on point can sound like he is a long way off, when he is really just down in a hole.Size of the Beeper on the Collar
It is not uncommon for my dogs to wear three or four collar straps when they hunt. This includes a regular ID collar, Remote training collar, tracking collar, and a beeper. Some folks have joked that I need to breed some long-necked dogs. Some of this can be fixed by using a remote beeper combo or using one of the add-on beepers such as the SportDOG Add-on Beeper Collar that are designed to be worn on your existing remote training collar. When using either of these beepers, you will need a counterweight if you do not use it with a remote collar. The counterweight keeps the beeper on the back of your dog's neck so you can hear it better.How Many Dogs are You Running at the Same Time?
We normally run two or three dogs at the same time. I prefer to be able to tell which dog is which by the different sounds of the beepers. Most beepers have a choice between double and single beeps allowing you to tell the difference between dogs. Some beepers also have different tone selections. You can differentiate between dogs by using different sounds. In some situations, I recommend using different brands of beepers on different dogs depending on their running style. Some beepers only have one sound or tone. This makes telling which dogs are which impossible. I prefer to use a remote beeper on my close running dogs. This gives me the ability to shut their beepers off when I am trying to locate a bigger running dog or a lost dog.Beeper Collars -- Rechargeable Collars versus Replaceable Batteries
I prefer replaceable batteries because of ease of use. Most beepers use a standard 9-volt battery and will last the entire season with moderate use.Beeper Collars with Hawk Scream versus Standard Beeper Tones
My take on Hawk Screams is if you get an advantage from them then great. Some birds are going to run no matter what, but some will hold better and longer with a Hawk Scream. I do not use it as the first reason to get a beeper, but if the beeper you need has one, give it a try. See the SportDOG Add-on Beeper Collar.Beeper Collars and the Ease of Changing Beeper Modes
Most folks do not think of this one, but I like to give it a little extra consideration. I seldom change modes, but if you hunt in different kinds of terrain you might want to switch from Run point to point only from time to time. Some beepers can be changed with the push of a button. Some require you to open them with a screwdriver and make the changes inside the unit. I am also a real big fan of the remote beepers that allow you to change modes from the transmitter. When I first saw this feature I didn't think it was a real big deal, but after using it in the field, I find I miss it on the products that do not offer it. See the Dogtra 2700 T&B beeper collar. The advantage of changing modes on the fly is that you can start off in Run-Point mode. If the cover opens up and you have an easy view of your dog, you can switch to point only mode and not have to listen to the beeper. This gives you the advantage also if you are trying to locate a missing dog or a big runner. While you are looking for one dog the other dog may go on point. If you had to shut his beeper off to look for the other dog, you now have one lost and one lost on point.Beeper Collars & Dog Tracking Collars
I run both beeper collars and tracking collars on my dogs at the same time. While this might seem like overdoing it, I really use the two products for different reasons. You can use a tracking collar that has a built-in behavioral circuit to keep up with a pointing dog and to tell you when he is on point. See dog tracking collars. While I do use this feature with my dogs, I find a beeper to be easier to keep track of the dog that is hunting within normal range. If one of my dogs gets out of hearing range, I can then use the tracking system to locate the dog and to see if she is on point. What if you want a beeper collar, remote trainer, and a bark collar? I have used every beeper collar that we sell in the field at one time or another and I will be glad to help you in making the choice that will fit your needs. We will be glad to help you if you have any questions about the correct product for your specific needs. Give us a call or drop us an email. --Steve]]>
Nelson Automatic Dog Waterer provides a constant supply of fresh clean water - Eliminates the hassles of manually watering your dogs.
- High grade 304 stainless steel is virtually indestructible.
- Float and valve assembly is fully protected by guard.
- Mounts on wall or kennel pole.
- You can mount the reversible valve assembly on the left or right side of the waterer for easy connection to a faucet.
Man's Best Friend Deserves The Best! - The Nelson Automatic Dog Waterer is the waterer that's never empty!
- Float actuated valve automatically replenishes the water as dogs drink.
- The Nelson Automatic Waterer is built to last a lifetime.
- The Nelson Waterer surfaces won't chip, crack or rust.
- Equipped with stainless steel wall mounting plate with pre-drilled holes.
- The drinking bowl is quickly removable from its wall or pole mount for thorough cleaning and sterilizing.
- Includes both kennel fence pole mounting brackets and wall mounting brackets.
- Kennel mounting hardware includes one kennel mounting bracket and two 1 1/2" bolts w/ nuts
- Also includes 12" supply hose.
Exterior dimensions: 10"L x 8"W x 4"H
Reservoir space: 6"L x 7"W x 4"H
Capacity: approx. 3.5 quarts Attaches to a standard outdoor spigot. If you need a longer hose, a standard garden hose will work, or you have a problem with your dog chewing the hose, try a metal washing machine line with a female to male adapter. This should be available at your local home improvement store. Made by Nelson MFG -- Always Fresh Clean Water -- Automatic Horse, Livestock and Pet Waterers. ]]>
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
The Ultimate Guide to Bird Dog Training
explains how to train a bird dog to hunt at a pace that suits a man walking, and to point and hold birds with all the elegance and style of a field trial champion. It combines successful traditional methods with modern electronic techniques to show how the nation’s top professional gun dog trainers develop reliable hunting dogs that are easy to control, exciting to watch, and stylish on point. Topics covered include:ITEM FEATURES:
X-Large Bizzy Bed- Zipper allows for cover removal and easier cleaning
- "Natural Dog Den" design caters to your dog's natural burrowing instincts
- Durable heavy-weight brown #12 canvas
- Shredded foam filling instead of polyfill
- Approx. Dimensions: 40" x 48" x 7"
- Zipper allows for cover removal
- Velcro straps to secure to your crate
- Durable 100% Berry compliant military-spec Cordura fabric is water-resistant
- Solid foam filling instead of polyfill
- Dimensions: 22" x 36" x 2"
Cleaning your Bizzy Bed and Crate Cushion:
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
ITEM FEATURES:
X-Large Bizzy Bed- Zipper allows for cover removal and easier cleaning
- "Natural Dog Den" design caters to your dog's natural burrowing instincts
- Camo side is durable heavy-weight 1000 D polyester fabric with urethane backing
- Brown side is 12 oz. canvas
- Shredded foam filling instead of polyfill
- Approx. Dimensions: 40" x 48" x 7"
- Zipper allows for cover removal
- Velcro straps to secure to your crate
- Durable heavy-weight 1000 D Polyester fabric
- Solid foam filling instead of polyfill
- Dimensions: 22" x 36" x 2"
Cleaning your Bizzy Bed and Crate Cushion:
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
ITEM FEATURES:
X-Large Bizzy Bed- Zipper allows for cover removal and easier cleaning
- "Natural Dog Den" design caters to your dog's natural burrowing instincts
- Camo side is durable heavy-weight 1000 D polyester fabric with urethane backing
- Brown side is 12 oz. canvas
- Shredded foam filling instead of polyfill
- Approx. Dimensions: 40" x 48" x 7"
- Zipper allows for cover removal
- Velcro straps to secure to your crate
- Durable heavy-weight 1000 D Polyester fabric
- Solid foam filling instead of polyfill
- Dimensions: 22" x 36" x 2"
Cleaning your Bizzy Bed and Crate Cushion:
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the foam dries, it'll fluff back up like new!
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
Click for larger image.
FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this collar, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number. Quick Release Adjustable Collar Embroidery Location:
Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this leash, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number.Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
Click for larger image.
FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this collar, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number. Quick Release Adjustable Collar Embroidery Location:
Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this leash, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number.Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 12", 14" and 16" Sizes: (prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 18" Size:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
We've provided a printable sizing chart below:
Formerly known as Bark'n Boots.
| |||||
Sizes |
Width (in) |
Length (in) |
Sleeve (in) | ||
These are for our retail customers ONLY. No dealers. Not for resale. Thanks! Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room. Depending on which design you choose, our tags will fit up to either 3 or 4 lines of information.
Instructions for attaching name plates using rivets:
Most of our collars are pre-punched for ID plates. If your collar is not, or you are adding a second ID plate:- Use the ID plate to mark where it will be attached to the collar
- For leather collars, use a leather punch tool, ice pick, or hammer and nail to make the holes for the rivets
- For nylon collars, the holes should be melted using a soldering iron or a heated nail or ice pick
- Line the plate up on top of the holes and put the stud part of the rivet through from the bottom
- Put the crown over the stud and hammer it closed on a hard surface (concrete or steel)
- You should drive the 2 pieces together until the upper surface flattens out
- Your I.D. tag is now attached!
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
- With ID Plate, the collar fits roughly 17" to 23" necks.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Quick Release Adjustable Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
Hey, everybody. Josh Miller here from Riverstone Kennels. Here to talk to you today about the RPM walking lead in the flat material. I love this flat material because it's so comfortable in your hand, whether you're training or simply walking down the sidewalk. This material itself is waterproof, is odor resistant, and it cleans up super easy if it were to get dirty. The snap option is great for anyone that looks to snap a lead onto a collar strap and then to get it out of the way it can snap back to the o-ring in the handle, and you can simply put it over your shoulder and walk conveniently with it out of your way, whether you're in the field or out training. This lead also has versatility depending on which length you're looking for as it comes in a four, a six, and an eight-foot option. Every RPM product is handmade here in the USA. It's superior products and with everything that they have to offer-- from material, to color, to length-- these truly are made by dog handlers for dog handlers.]]>
Hey everybody. Josh Miller here from Riverstone Kennels. Here to talk to you about the RPM walking lead. This walking lead is a great tool whether you're going to be out training or just taking a walk around the neighborhood. What this lead is gonna offer you is flexible ranges as far as there's a four, a six, and an eight-foot option, as well as flat and round material choices. The stop that you'll find on the lead, you can adjust to make sure that the lead doesn't open up too much if your dog is walking on a loose lead. The material that these leads are made out of is odor-resistant, waterproof, and if it does get dirty as gun dogs do, just simply take a washcloth with some soap and water, wipe it off and you're good as new. Set. Heel. Set. Heel. Every RPM product is handmade here in the USA. It's superior products and with everything that they have to offer from material to color to length, these truly are made by dog handlers for dog handlers.]]>
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Steel ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a 3-line or 4-line laser-engraved 2.75" x .75" steel I.D. plate for FREE which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- 3-line tags fit:
- 16 characters on the top BIG line
- 25 characters on the next two lines
- 4-line tags fit:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
- Your dog can't mark what he can't see so be fair to him by selecting the appropriate color bumper for each scenario. Training situations change often and can vary from one mark to the next in the same set up so make sure you have several of each color bumper when you head out for training. This simple rule of thumb will help you maximize your training time and efficiency.
Help your dog be successful!
Jeremiah Harston
Sporting Dog Specialist
Avery Pro-Staff
- Round up your bumpers and store them in a bag or bucket at the end of each training session. A bumper that is lying around becomes an invitation to a young dog to chew on. Not only is this negative reinforcement to your dog's mark training, but it is almost sure to get you an expensive and unnecessary trip to your vet's office. If you keep it simple, you'll avoid complications!
Let's go to the Woods!
Chris Akin
Avery Team WaterDog
Webfooted Kennels
- Your dog can't mark what he can't see so be fair to him by selecting the appropriate color bumper for each scenario. Training situations change often and can vary from one mark to the next in the same set up so make sure you have several of each color bumper when you head out for training. This simple rule of thumb will help you maximize your training time and efficiency.
Help your dog be successful!
Jeremiah Harston
Sporting Dog Specialist
Avery Pro-Staff
- Round up your bumpers and store them in a bag or bucket at the end of each training session. A bumper that is lying around becomes an invitation to a young dog to chew on. Not only is this negative reinforcement to your dog's mark training, but it is almost sure to get you an expensive and unnecessary trip to your vet's office. If you keep it simple, you'll avoid complications!
Let's go to the Woods!
Chris Akin
Avery Team WaterDog
Webfooted Kennels
- Your dog can't mark what he can't see so be fair to him by selecting the appropriate color bumper for each scenario. Training situations change often and can vary from one mark to the next in the same set up so make sure you have several of each color bumper when you head out for training. This simple rule of thumb will help you maximize your training time and efficiency.
Help your dog be successful!
Jeremiah Harston
Sporting Dog Specialist
Avery Pro-Staff
- Round up your bumpers and store them in a bag or bucket at the end of each training session. A bumper that is lying around becomes an invitation to a young dog to chew on. Not only is this negative reinforcement to your dog's mark training, but it is almost sure to get you an expensive and unnecessary trip to your vet's office. If you keep it simple, you'll avoid complications!
Let's go to the Woods!
Chris Akin
Avery Team WaterDog
Webfooted Kennels
- Your dog can't mark what he can't see so be fair to him by selecting the appropriate color bumper for each scenario. Training situations change often and can vary from one mark to the next in the same set up so make sure you have several of each color bumper when you head out for training. This simple rule of thumb will help you maximize your training time and efficiency.
Help your dog be successful!
Jeremiah Harston
Sporting Dog Specialist
Avery Pro-Staff
- Round up your bumpers and store them in a bag or bucket at the end of each training session. A bumper that is lying around becomes an invitation to a young dog to chew on. Not only is this negative reinforcement to your dog's mark training, but it is almost sure to get you an expensive and unnecessary trip to your vet's office. If you keep it simple, you'll avoid complications!
Let's go to the Woods!
Chris Akin
Avery Team WaterDog
Webfooted Kennels
Features:
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust approximately 1-inch longer or 2.5-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
WHY A LEATHER DOG COLLAR?
Some dog trainers prefer leather collars when training their dogs because it won't pull on a dog's neck like nylon or other synthetic material when you're working with a dog. Leather has a different kind of friction. Leather doesn't spin on a dog the same as nylon. Doesn't tangle. Moves better on the dog's neck when cornering. The collar turns easier. Many dog owners like the look and feel of leather dog collars. Leather is one of the world's strongest materials and lasts a long time when taken care of properly. Leather is very durable. On the downside, you have to care for leather collars a little more, especially if you're working your dogs in water and the leather gets wet. You can clean a leather dog collar with a leather cleaner such as SADDLE SOAP. You also don't want a collar to dry out, so keep it clean and oiled with neatsfoot oil or another leather conditioner. If you have a dog with a light-colored coat like a yellow labrador retriever, don't put something on the collar that will stain the dog's neck!LEATHER COLLAR: BLACK HARDWARE
This Omnipet Leather Dog Collar has both a center o-ring AND a D-ring. Multiple rings are great for training your dog because you have plenty of options to attach leads, leashes, checkcords, and other training tools. For example, if you have your dog on a stake-out chain hooked to the black D-ring, you can hook your leash to center ring w/o unhooking from the stake until you have control over your dog. Center-ring collars are safety collars, and if worn loose enough, a dog can roll out of a center-ring collar if it gets caught on a fence or hung up. Leather Collar Features:COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
Click for larger image.
FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this collar, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number. Quick Release Adjustable Collar Embroidery Location:
Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this leash, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number.Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inches longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
Click for larger image.
FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this collar, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number. Quick Release Adjustable Collar Embroidery Location:
Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this leash, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number.Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 12", 14" and 16" Sizes: (prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 18" Size:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
Overall Length: 7"
Height: 5.25"
Weight: 1.6 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Blued Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering starter pistols, blank pistols, and/or blanks.
Overall Length: 7"
Height: 5.25"
Weight: 1.6 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Blued Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering pistols and/or blanks. Limited Lifetime Warranty In addition to offering repair and service, Alfa-Proj warrants to the original purchaser that the product is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. Damage due to abuse, misuse, neglect, or unauthorized adjustments or modifications made or attempted by anyone other than the stated factory repair service is excluded from this warranty. The Lifetime Service Policy covers functional defects. Alfa-Proj will repair or replace, at its option, any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship. The conditions of this warranty are twofold: First, the purchaser must return the warranty card with proof of retail purchase to: Elite Custom Guns, 2522 Tranquil Way, Sevierville, TN 37876-0170 within thirty days of purchase. Please include a copy of your purchase receipt. Second, the purchaser must notify Elite Custom Guns service department, in writing or by e-mail (elitecustomguns@gmail.com), stating the difficulty experienced and the date and place of original purchase. Excluded from this warranty are malfunctions caused by misuse or abuse of the starter revolver, damage due to lack of proper cleaning and maintenance, unauthorized modification, adjustments or repairs, shipping damages, careless handling, normal wear and tear, and defective or improperly loaded ammunition and corrosion. Alfa-Proj's responsibility under this warranty is limited to the repair or replacement of the revolver. Responsibility or liability for damage to property other than the revolver, personal injury or death, or consequential damages is SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED.]]>
Save up to 20% on closeouts, open box items, and more!
"Once they're gone, they're GONE!"
Getting Good Game Birds for Training Your Upland Dog
For most of us, the days of training a bird dog only on wild birds are long gone. The majority of today's bird dogs get their start on pen raised birds. The first step in training a bird dog is finding good birds. Many of these pen raised birds tend to run instead of flying or in the worst case not moving at all, having been raised like "chickens" and only associating people with feeding time. I have several good breeders in my area but I also have my own flight pen that I use to make the young birds strong and wary. It is important to locate a game farm that understands what you are doing and raises its birds to be strong flyers and "afraid" of human and dog contact. A good source for locating birds in your general area is on the Quail Forever website. Select your State and the Species that you need and you will find a list of folks in your area. The majority of these folks will sell you birds for a fee. Always be sure to buy from the folks that have their own shooting preserves and not the ones that only raise birds for restaurants.What is a Box Style Bird Launcher?
Even with good birds, it is important to be able to control the location of your birds and the timing of their flush when you are working a young dog. A box style bird launcher allows you to create the setup that you need and it will keep the birds where you put them. You can also launch them the moment that you need to. This is very important in the working of a young flushing dog or pointer. Box launchers allow you to control where the birds are placed and when they will flush. Even when birds aren't great flyers, they will still move on when you toss them 6 to 8 feet in the air. Flushing birds with remote “catapult” type launchers is the closest thing to training on wild birds. Better yet, you can control the location of the birds and when they will flush with remote launchers. When steadying a pointing dog to wing and shot, using two or more launchers at the same location can help maintain the dog’s interest and intensity after the initial flush. An occasional second and third delayed flush will help the dog anticipate additional flushes on all points and, therefore, help maintain it's interest and intensity longer. Manual launchers can also be used for the delayed second and third flushes. The steel box has an open design which permits good air flow so dogs have the advantage of plenty of scent to help them locate the bird. A box style bird launcher is a metal box that has a cordura or mesh pocket that allows you to place the bird inside. The box has strong springs attached to the arms and is held in place by a locking arm. When you are ready for the birds to fly, you press the release mechanism and the springs throw the bird 6 to 8 feet in the air. This create a simulated flush and the bird then flies off to the closest cover. Bird Launchers come in regular sizes that can be used with pigeons, quail, and chuckar. Many of the models also have larger versions for pheasants. The Pheasant sized units can launch the smaller birds also, but the regular sized boxes are too small to be used with pheasant hens or roosters. If you want to use both pheasants and smaller game birds, you can either purchase all pheasant sized boxes or you can mix and match. The remote systems allow you to use both sized boxes with the same transmitter.Manual Bird Launchers
All of the launchers that we sell come in manual versions where you have to trigger the launch by pulling a cord or stepping on the release arm with your foot. This is the inexpensive route but it also requires that you have some help to either control your young dog or a helper to launch the bird at the correct time. There is nothing worse then the young dog that does everything perfect and then you screw it up by not being able to create the flush at the right time. The easy way to use a manual launcher is by adding a pull cord. Simply attach a long cord to the launcher and lay it out down wind from the launcher. I recommend that you stake the launcher to the ground so that you will have something to pull against. It's very frustrating to pull the cord and flip the launcher over instead of having it launch. Normally your dog should be brought in from the down wind side (for best scenting conditions) and you should end up close to the cord. You can also add multiple cords and lay them out in several directions so you can increase the odds of being close to one of the cords. I also recommend that you use a bright color so you can see it in the grass.Remote Bird Launchers
Remote Bird Launchers allow you to train alone. You have a small transmitter that you carry with you and can launch the birds from a distance without having to take you eyes off your dog. This is the way to go, but it is also very expensive compared to using all manual versions. Many folks will mix it up and use both kinds depending on what kind of training situation they are trying to create for their bird dog Remote Launchers do not need to be staked down since they are shooting up Remote Bird Launchers are very useful in staunching and steadying well-started pointing dogs and in encouraging flushing dogs We also recommend that all dogs be on a check cord or otherwise under complete control when using manual spring-loaded "catapult" type launchers.How old should my dog be before I start using a bird launcher?
It's hard to put an exact age on anything in dog training. Some dogs will be ready at 6 months while others may be 12 to 16 months. You want to wait until your dog has been introduced to birds, gunfire, and is showing a good interest in "hunting" Bird launchers should not be used to introduce young dogs to birds. The last thing you want is a young pup getting too close and then have the launcher go off and scare your dog. This is a great way to turn your pointing dog into a "blinker." Bird Launchers they should not be used with young dogs that do not have a certain amount of control. I always recommend that you work your young dogs on a check cord when using a bird launcher so you can stop them before they get too close. You can always pick them up and move them back before you flush the birds if needed.Why would you need a Beeper on a bird launcher?
I asked the same question the first time I saw one. It's a great idea but it has nothing to do with the training of the dog. The beeper allows you to locate the launchers after you are finished and have put your dogs back in the truck. Until you have spent 20 minutes searching a grass field for that last launcher because you can't remember where you hid it, a beeper makes a lot of sense. I have had to go back to the truck in the past to get a dog out to "find" a missing launcher. It is a cool idea that will save you time in the long run. A beeper attached to the Remote Launchers allows for quick and easy location with a touch of a button from your transmitter. This is a very handy feature when you are working with several bird launchers in a large area. At the end of your training session, you can activate the beeper locator to go back and pick up your launchers. DT has a battery saver feature that shuts down the system after it has lauched the bird, but the remote beepers will work even when the launcher is shut off. Both Dogtra and D T Systems launchers have a built in remote beeper locator.Choosing Between the Dogtra Remote Release and the Tri-Tronics Pro Control
When you are looking at buying many of the remote launchers, wingers and bird throwers on the market today, you will also need to pick between the two major remote release systems. Remote electronics are required for the operation of all of the Dogtra Bird Launchers, Thunder Equipment / Etch-Marc Thunderbirds, Zinger Wingers, and the Train-Rite Dummy Launcher Stand. Both of these systems will operate most units on the market and they both work in the same basic way, so you really only have to look at a few differences to pick the correct remote release electronics system for your training needs. Dogtra and Tri-Tronics Similarities:These are for our retail customers ONLY. No dealers. Not for resale. Thanks! Enter your contact information in the blank form above. We recommend that you list multiple phone numbers along with your name, city, state, and address if you have room. Depending on which design you choose, our tags will fit up to either 3 or 4 lines of information.
Instructions for attaching name plates using rivets:
Most of our collars are pre-punched for ID plates. If your collar is not, or you are adding a second ID plate:- Use the ID plate to mark where it will be attached to the collar
- For leather collars, use a leather punch tool, ice pick, or hammer and nail to make the holes for the rivets
- For nylon collars, the holes should be melted using a soldering iron or a heated nail or ice pick
- Line the plate up on top of the holes and put the stud part of the rivet through from the bottom
- Put the crown over the stud and hammer it closed on a hard surface (concrete or steel)
- You should drive the 2 pieces together until the upper surface flattens out
- Your I.D. tag is now attached!
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Teach, Not Test
- Other Training Tidbits
- Puppy Stuff
- Explanation of Levels: Beginning, Intermediate, Advanced
- A Quick Word About E-Collars
- Phase One -- Obedience, Line Work and Team Building
- Holding Blind Drill
- Clockwork
- Remember Me?
- Where's Waldo
- Swing With The Gun
- Head-Swinging Drill
- Phase Two -- Marking
- X Marking Drill
- Split X Marketing Drill
- Walk-Away Marks
- Ontario Ten-Step
- Diversion Mark Drill
- Depth Perception Marketing Drill
- Depth Perception Drill Two
- Double Drill
- Creamsicle
- Inline Marks
- Wipe-Out Marks
- Channel Marks
- ABCD Marking Drill
- Slot Marks
- Two-Along-The-Shore-Marks
- Help Guidelines for Marks
- Phase Three -- Handling
- Ladder Blinds
- Wagon Wheel
- First Look
- Push-Pull
- Pile Work - Problem and Solution Chart
- Pile Work - Baseball
- Pile Work - Back Pile
- Pile Work - T Drill
- Christmas Tree Drill
- Straight Back
- Back vs. Angle Back Drill
- Come-In Whistle Drill
- Progressive Blinds - School Blinds
- Swish Drill
- Interrupted Double Drill
- Four Phase AKA Blind Diversion Drill
- Cast Off
- Looking Glass
- W Drill
- MW's Influential Lining Drill
- Three In A Row
- Zig Zag
- Bird Boy Blinds
- Over Parallel To Shore
- Holding Blind Blinds
- Back Parallel To Shore
- Cast Over Into Water / Through An Obstacle
- Poison Bird
- Chair Drill
- Tune Up Drill
- Split or Bucket Drill
- Tight to the Gun Handling Drill
- List of Drills by Level of Difficulty
- NEVER STOP DOING THESE DRILLS--LIST
- Training Group Etiquette
- The Best Stuff
- Sample Log
- About the Author
"The vast majority of our e-collar customers LOVE training and working their dogs on an e-collar.
And you will, too!" -- 
Check out real customer reviews!
And you get 30 days to find out how much you like yours!
Use your collar. On your dog. Outside.
Using your new e-collar WILL NOT affect your ability to return or exchange it during your 30-day trial period.- -- Use it every day.
-- Train in the water and in the mud!
-- Cut your collar straps down to size.
You will be happy with your e-collar, or we'll fix everything!
- -- Enjoy hassle-free returns and exchanges.
-- Exchange your collar for another model or brand.
-- Return it for a full refund.
-- You DO NOT have to send it back "like new" or in resellable condition.
-- You pay NO RESTOCKING FEES.
Wired or Wireless? Which is the Better Dog Fence?
- you bury a wire antenna around the area of enclosure creating a perimeter.
- A transmitter in your garage generates the perimeter boundary signal and monitors the continuity of the wire.
- Your dog wears a receiver collar.
- If he crosses the boundary created by the wire, he receives corrective stimulation by electric current. By negative reinforcement, your dog learns to stay within the perimeter.
Wired Pet Containment Systems
In a wired pet containment system,Wireless Pet Containment Systems
In a wireless pet containment system, the transmitter creates a circular field. If your dog travels outside the boundary of that field, he receives that electric stimulation. Again, by repetition and training, he learns to stay inside the field. A wireless system is easier to install. But it doesn't adapt to the shape of your yard. Say, for example, that you want to reduce the radius of the field to the edge of your front street. You may also wind up restricting your dog's movement to only a portion of your back yard. A wireless system is most effective for a home that's centered on your property. But since most people's homes are not so perfectly symmetrical, a wired system is probably best.Choosing Features
Lightning Protection
Both wired and wireless pet containment systems operate through the generation of electric fields -- wired systems, from the antenna or ground wire; wireless systems, from the transmitter. Because your system is powered by your home's AC current, it can be vulnerable to power surges. A surge protector may protect your system from problems emanating from your power company, but it will not protect it from lightning or even a buildup of static electricity in the atmosphere during a storm. If your system fails, your dog is free to wander outside the perimeter. We recommend lightning protection to keep your pet and your investment safe.Battery Back-up
If the power to your system's transmitter fails altogether, you need a back-up power source to keep the system operational. We recommend battery back-up as a precaution.Audible Line Break Warning
A wired system operates in a closed loop. If the loop (or wire) breaks, the system fails. An audible line break warning clearly alerts you to a problem. To locate the disruption in the ground wire, we recommend an "RF choke" device available at most electronics stores. Once you've installed this device, you can use a simple AM radio to find the problem and fix it. We recommend an audible line break warning so that you don't have to depend on your own monitoring of the transmitter.Installing Your Pet Containment System
- Run the wire through an existing seam or crack in the drive.
- Run the wire through an existing drainage pipe under the drive. Caution: Since the wire will be deeper below ground your field width may be narrowed. We recommend you test the system in this area to be certain the collar is receiving a signal.
- You may cut a concrete or paved drive using a circular saw with a masonry blade. After inserting the wire in the cut fill the cut with heavy caulk or asphalt patch.
- This type of installation gives the dog access to the house.
- Can be used to produce a double wide field.
- Can be fit to most yards. This type of installation does require more wire than a single loop installation. Caution: Take care to not create a gap between the fields. We recommend you lay the wire on top of the ground and test the system prior to burying the wire.
- Run the wire through an existing seam or crack in the drive.
- Run the wire through an existing drainage pipe under the drive. Caution: Since the wire will be deeper below ground your field width may be narrowed. We recommend you test the system in this area to be certain the collar is receiving a signal.
- You may cut a concrete or paved drive using a circular saw with a masonry blade. After inserting the wire in the cut fill the cut with heavy caulk or asphalt patch. We recommend you lay the wire out and test the system with the collar prior to burial. You should also check to see if the collar is activated near the existing fence in other parts of the yard. If this is the case move your boundary wire further away from the fence. Take care to not create a gap between the fields.
- Run the wire through an existing seam or crack in the drive.
- Run the wire through an existing drainage pipe under the drive. Caution: Since the wire will be deeper below ground your field width may be narrowed. We recommend you test the system in this area to be certain the collar is receiving a signal.
- You may cut a concrete or paved drive using a circular saw with a masonry blade. After inserting the wire in the cut fill the cut with heavy caulk or asphalt patch.
Wired systems
Once you've chosen the layout that's right for your property, you'll want to leave the wire aboveground until you've tested the system for gaps. Installing the wire below ground is simple. Use a shovel to "slice" open the soil, then place the wire no more than 1-2 inches below the surface. An electric edger is also effective. After installation, just brush the dirt back over the seam. Wired pet containment systems must be installed in a loop. The transmitter is placed in your garage and operates on your home's AC current. It joins the loop together. If the loop is broken, the system will not function. We'll troubleshoot problems later in this document.Basic Installation -- Front and Back Yard
-
This type of boundary set up is probably the easiest and most common installation. The entire lot including your home is enclosed in the loop.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
You may cross a paved or concrete drive way by several methods:
Basic Installation -- Back Yard Only
-
This type of boundary set up is very easy to install. The loop is used to enclose a defined area, such as the front or back yard.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
This type of installation does not give the dog access to the house.
Double Loop Installation -- Back Yard Only
-
This type of boundary set up produces a double wide field and can be fit to most yards. The double loop is used to define 3 sides of the containment area and the house is used to define the fourth boundary. The 2 wires should be separated by 3-8 feet depending on your field width settings.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
We recommend this type of installation for most yards.
Double Loop Installation -- Back Yard with Pool or Shed
-
This type of boundary set up is a variation of the Double Loop Installation. This variation is used to define a containment area as well as deny your dog access to smaller areas, like a pool or tool shed, within the yard. Use Double Strand wire to connect the smaller inner loop to the boundary.
This type of boundary set up produces a double wide field and can be fit to most yards. The double loop is used to define 3 sides of the containment area and the house is used to define the fourth boundary. The 2 wires should be separated by 3-8 feet depending on your field width settings.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
This type of installation gives the dog access to the house.
Caution: Take care to not create a gap between the fields. We reccommend you lay the wire on top of the ground and test the system prior to burying the wire.
Double Loop Installation with Existing Fencing - Front and Back Yard
-
This type of boundary set up is a variation of the Double Loop Installation. This variation is used where existing fencing defines one or more sides of a yard. Works great if your neighbors have fences on one or more sides of your lot.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
You may cross a paved or concrete drive way by several methods:
Double Loop Installation with Existing Fencing - Back Yard Only
-
This type of boundary set up is a variation of the Double Loop Installation. This variation is used where existing fencing defines one or more sides of a yard. Works great if your neighbors have fences on one or more sides of your lot. Use Double Strand wire along the boundary where you have fencing.
Twisted Wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
This type of installation gives the dog access to the house.
Caution: You should avoid placing the wire close to metallic objects such as chain link fences. We recommend you lay the wire out and test the system with the collar prior to burial. You should also check to see if the collar is activate near the fence in other parts of the yard. If this is the case move your boundary wire further away from the fence.
Take care to not create a gap between the fields.
Gate Blocker Installation
-
This type of boundary set up is a variation of the Double Loop Installation. This variation is used to block the dogs access to a gate or other opening in a fence or other boundary. Use Double Strand wire to connect the smaller inner loop to the boundary.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
This type of installation gives the dog access to the house.
Caution: You should avoid placing the wire close to metallic objects such as chain link fences. We recommend you lay the wire out and test the system with the collar prior to burial. You should also check to see if the collar is activate near the fence in other parts of the yard. If this is the case move your boundary wire further away from the fence.
Take care to not create a gap between the fields. We also recommend that you block the area around the gate and not just the opening.
Flower Bed Protection
-
This type of boundary set up is a variation of the Double Loop Installation. This variation is used to block the dog's access to a particular area in your yard such as flower beds or your garden. This type of installation can be used with existing fencing as well as other containment installations. Use Double Strand wire to connect the smaller inner loop to the boundary. The boundary wire can be buried in front or inside the beds.
Twisted wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to each bed. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
This type of installation gives the dog access to the house.
Caution: You should avoid placing the wire too close the exterior walls of your home. The field can pass through the wall and your dog could receive a stimulation indoors. We recommend you lay the wire out and test the system with the collar prior to burial. You should also check to see if the collar is activated near interior walls. If this is the case move your boundary wire further away from the wall.
Take care to not create a gap between the fields. We also recommend that you block the area around the gate and not just the opening.
Combination Installation
-
This installation is based on a real customer's yard. He wanted to enclose his entire piece of property and keep the dogs off of his patio/pool area as well as off his 2 putting greens.
Twisted Wire is used for the run from the transmitter (in Garage) to the perimeter and to the restricted zones. Using 2 pieces of single strand boundary wire twisted together produces no boundary. We recommend you twist this wire using an electric drill or something similar. You want approximately 1 twist per inch. Remember as it twists it will draw up, so allow plenty of extra.
Using elements of the single loop as well as the double loop design he was able to define the boundaries exactly as he wanted.
Wireless Systems
Wireless System -- Single Transmitter
-
Wireless transmitter creates a circular containment zone with adjustable radius to fit your property. The maximum radius varies depending on which wireless system you have. Some systems allow additional transmitters to be added to enlarge the containment area.
Transmitters must be installed indoors.
Wireless System -- Multiple Transmitters
-
Multiple wireless transmitters create overlapping containment zones. Dog may pass from one zone to another without receiving a correction.
Wireless transmitter creates a circular containment zone with adjustable radius to fit your property. The maximum radius varies depending on which wireless system you have. Some systems allow additional transmitters to be added to enlarge the containment area.
Transmitters must be installed indoors.
Training Your Dog to Live in a Pet Containment System
- You can't expect any pet containment system to be effective without training your dog. It's not like a fence. It's invisible. Your dog will be confused. Plus a determined, untrained dog will withstand the stimulation long enough to break free.
We recommend that your dog be at least six (6) months old and weigh at least ten (10) pounds before you consider a pet containment system. Any younger, and your dog probably will not accept the necessary training. Any smaller, and the receiver collar will not fit snugly.
If you do not train your dog to live with your pet containment system, he may not go into the yard at all. Or he may find a spot, afraid to move, and sit motionless.
Your pet containment system is a safe, humane way to discipline your dog, but it won't work without you.
- Let your dog wear the receiver/collar for 3-7 days before activating your pet containment system. He'll get used to the collar. He needs to learn that the perimeter, not the collar, issues corrective stimulation.
- The receiver collar must be snug against your dog's skin. You may have heard of the "three fingers" rule, where you are able to slip three fingers under your dog's collar to ensure a relaxed fit. A snug collar is safe, comfortable, and necessary for your system to work properly.
- Do not allow your dog to wear the collar more than 12 hours at a time. Because of the corrective prongs on the underside of the collar, wearing the collar 24 hours a day can lead to skin irritation. When your dog is not wearing the receiver collar, he should be inside your home or kenneled.
- Use flags to mark the boundaries of the perimeter at first. Your dog will need visual cues to learn. Leave the flags up for 15-30 days.
- Your dog needs to be on the leash the first time he receives corrective stimulation. Walk your dog on a leash. When he crosses the corrective field, pull him out and issue "sit" and "stay" commands.
- You direct your dog to appropriate behaviors. He must learn from you.
- Pick a spot on the perimeter.
- Deactivate your pet containment system.
- Command your dog to "sit" and "stay" in the perimeter at that spot.
- Cross the perimeter and issue a "come" command. The dog will exit the perimeter without receiving corrective stimulation.
- Use the same spot every time to let your dog exit the perimeter. This is your "invisible gate."
Learning the Containment System's Corrective Field
Frequently Asked Questions
- Q - How old does a dog have to be before starting training?
A - This is somewhat breed dependent, but most breeds should be at least 6 months of age.
Q - During training an owner observes their dog sitting in the pet containment system correction zone. The owner has touched the probes and has determined the collar is working. The owner can see the dog's skin flinch, so he is sure the dog is receiving the correction. What should the owner do to prevent this from happening?
A - Retrain the dog by putting it on a long leash. As soon as the dog is observed entering the corrective zone it should be pulled out and redirected to the "sit" and "stay" command.
Q - Once a dog is trained to the pet containment system, what is the best way to take the dog out of the boundary?
A - Create what is called an "invisible gate" and take the dog out only through this gate.
Q - Once a dog is trained to the pet containment system how does the owner create the "invisible gate" concept?
A - Place a long leash on the dog. Turn the pet containment system off. Remove the dog's collar. Put the dog on the "sit" and "stay" command near the area that will become the "gate". Owner walks out of yard and asks dog to "come".
Q - If a dog is running through the system at only one spot in the yard, how is this corrected?
A - Set him up at this location. For example, have him on a long leash and then have someone else walk by that spot or walk their dog by that spot. When the dog attempts to leave - pull him back with the leash and then redirect him to the "sit" and "stay" commands.
Q - What is the dummy collar effect?
A - This is a procedure where the collar is eliminated as a factor in learning. In other words, the dog wears the collar without it being activated for 3-5 days. This way the dog does not learn that the collar causes the correction, but rather getting to close to the yard boundary.
Q - How long should an owner take to create the dummy collar effect?
A - On the average, it will take at least 3 days and as long as 7 days.
Q - How many days should the dog wear a deactivated collar before receiving the correction for the first time?
A - At least three days and in some cases as long as 7 days.
Q - The first time the dog receives the correction should he be on or off a leash?
A - On the leash. This way the owner can easily redirect the dog to the appropriate behavior.
Q - What is the purpose of having the dog on a leash the first time he receives the correction?
A - So in the event the dog would become confused, the owner can easily direct him to the appropriate behavior.
Q - How long should the owner leave the flags up?
A - The flags should remain for at least 2 weeks, but in some cases as long as 30 days.
Q - What is meant by the "safe zone"?
A - The area where the dog can roam freely without getting a correction.
Q - Is this a humane way to train a dog?
A - Absolutely. While the correction is unpleasant, it is harmless to your pet. Electronic training devices require interaction and training from the owner to achieve desired results.
Q - How do I prevent one dog from chewing on the collar of another dog?
A - If you see one dog chewing on the other dog's collar - pull him off and redirect him to "sit" and "stay".
HOW THEY WORK: TELEMETRY VS. GPS
MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RANGE
The biggest advantage that radio telemetry tracking collars have over GPS tracking systems is range.DIRECTION AND DISTANCE
One problem with a radio telemetry tracking collar is that it never tells you exact distance, so you have to do some guesswork and test your system. Telemetry collars give very limited information on distance -- it's more about direction. You can estimate the distance based on the amount of gain (signal strength) that is required to get the signal from the tracking collar, but this can change based on the terrain that is between you and the dog. For example, if your dog is in the bottom of a ravine and there is dirt between you and him, you would need a lot of power to pick up a signal. Once the dog comes out of the ravine you would get a much better signal without the same power. So depending on what's between you and the dog, you will have a hard time telling the exact distance. GPS dog tracking systems show you exactly where your dog is. These systems have the same range limitations as tracking collars because radio signals will only go so far. As long as you can pick up the signal, you know the exact distance between you and your dog and what he is doing (pointing or running).WHEN YOUR DOG RUNS OUT OF RANGE, WHAT THEN?
The biggest difference when using a GPS tracking system is that you will be able to see the exact point that the signal drops off. You will also have the advantage of knowing the last spot you were able to get a signal. With a tracking collar, once you lose the signal, you no longer have any information. You are either getting a signal or you don't. When you lose your signal you have to start hunting your dog by trying to get close enough to actually pick up the signal. This can be a major problem if you have no idea where to start looking. With a GPS dog tracking system, you will know the exact location that you got the last signal. This allows you to immediately go to the last known location and pick up a current location.WHAT ABOUT BEEPER COLLARS?
THE ADVANTAGES OF GPS DOG TRACKING
USING A GARMIN ALPHA DOG GPS SYSTEM IN FIELD TRIALS OR POINTING DOG HUNT TESTS
The Garmin T20 collars are AKC Competition Approved. The AKC Performance Events Department has approved them for use in pointing breed field trials and hunting tests.]]>Thanks for your recent order from Gun Dog Supply. Hope you and your dog are doing fine.
We're using a new, 3rd party ratings service called SHOPPER APPROVED to measure your happiness.
but their privacy policy is pretty tight, and they don't share your info. Appreciate your business & friendship, and please let us know
if you have any questions or need anything!
STEVE SNELL
Would you mind taking a minute or so to rate us?
It asks for you to rate your satisfaction with our SHIPPING and SERVICE on a 5-star scale on 6 different factors. It DOES ask you for your email so they can verify that you're a real person,but their privacy policy is pretty tight, and they don't share your info. Appreciate your business & friendship, and please let us know
if you have any questions or need anything!
Thanks!
STEVE SNELL
]]>
Overall Length: 6.50"
Height: 4.5"
Weight: .70 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Orange Cerakote Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering pistols and/or blanks.]]>
Overall Length: 7.25"
Height: 5"
Weight: .75 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Black Matte Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering pistols and/or blanks. ]]>
Overall Length: 6.5"
Height: 4.25"
Weight: .65 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Orange Cerakote Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering pistols and/or blanks. ]]>
Overall Length: 7.25"
Height: 5"
Weight: .75 lbs.
Capacity: 6
Finish: Black Matte Use and/or possession of blank pistols (starter pistols) and blanks is prohibited and/or restricted in some jurisdictions. Laws change frequently. Therefore, all buyers should check with local authorities prior to ordering pistols and/or blanks.]]>
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Steel ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a 3-line or 4-line laser-engraved 2.75" x .75" steel I.D. plate for FREE which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- 3-line tags fit:
- 16 characters on the top BIG line
- 25 characters on the next two lines
- 4-line tags fit:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Steel ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a 3-line or 4-line laser-engraved 2.75" x .75" steel I.D. plate for FREE which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- 3-line tags fit:
- 16 characters on the top BIG line
- 25 characters on the next two lines
- 4-line tags fit:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
Features:
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 5"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 5" Small: Length: 6"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 6"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 5" Medium: Length: 8"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 8"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 6" Large: Length: 10"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 10"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 7" X-Large: Length: 12"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 12"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 8"]]>
Small -- 20-35 lbs.
Medium -- 35-45 lbs.
Large -- 45-60 lbs.
X-Large -- 60-80 lbs.
XX-Large -- 80-100 lbs.]]>
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 5"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 5" Small: Length: 6"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 6"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 5" Medium: Length: 8"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 8"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 6" Large: Length: 10"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 10"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 7" X-Large: Length: 12"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 12"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 8"]]>
From the Manufacturer:
Why the Problem Exists: The #1 performance problem with traditional and existing electronic training devices is the capability to interface their output to the animal's sensory system consistently and effectively over time, and without causing trauma to the animal's skin, both of which lead to behavioral side-effects. As an example -- a barking dog is just waiting for the owner to take the collar off so it can bark again. When a containment system is being used, one must kennel the dog during neck resting periods. While using a remote trainer, subtleness is extremely important where the level of stimulation being deployed needs to be clearly understood by the dog. The Solution: By simply redirecting the stimulator's output energy through many conductors spaced in a small centralized location, this concentrated energy greatly improves the excitation of the nerve endings; wherein, even lower levels of stimulation can deliver concise, consistent, and efficient messages to the animal's sensory system while not causing tissue breakdown, even with 24/7 usage. The Result: Continuous wear-time without causing skin tissue breakdown (anti-bark and containment fencing devices), while reducing the level of stimulation (remote trainers) allows for animals to learn quicker with improved behavior modification results with virtually no trauma. "Real" value realized for the customer's investment. Why the SCG System works: Existing training devices use at least two protruding metal electrodes to distribute the stimulator's output to the animal. These two electrodes are attached to the stimulator housing and are commonly spaced from 1 to 1 1/2 inches apart. They must protrude far enough from the stimulator housing to penetrate the animal's coat and make direct contact with the skin -- generally 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch in length. The distance alone between the two electrodes requires many more nerve endings needing to be energized consistently while the mass of these two electrodes impairs the focal point of the electrical energy. With most of today's electronic training products offering the means to adjust the level of stimulation delivered to the animal, subtleness is extremely important during training sessions when applying different levels or kinds of stimulation. Unfortunately, this requires greater importance on the performance of the electronic circuitry to transfer its energy output to the animal consistently and effectively. This demand is what contributes to the poor performance capability of these products, and is conveniently overcome by simply installing the SCG adapter. By providing this improved interface, the dog will now be able to learn what is expected from its human partner quicker, easier, and with less confusion (stress), and in many cases at lower levels of stimulation. Conversely, the owner/trainer can remove the fear-factor concerning neck trauma leading to unnecessary veterinarian costs.]]>
- Dogs for Pheasants
- Guns and Shooting
- Flushing Dog Shots
- Pointing Dog Shots
- Hits on Pheasants
- Small Party Hunting
- Large Party Hunting
- Go it Alone?
- Grassland Pheasants
- Quail Hunting for Pheasants
- Pheasant Foolery
- Go Early? Go Late?
- Going Early
- Going Late
- The Birds
- The Shooting
- The Dog
- The Strategy
- The Upside
- Good Years, Bad Years
- Choosing the Right Partners
- Go Prepared
- Local Shooting Preserves
- Prairie Pheasant Lodges
- The Pinnacle
- The Aging Pheasant Hunter
- The Future
- Pheasant Recipes
- Orange-Simmered Pheasant
- Pheasant Francaise with Fettuccini
- Pheasant with Saffron Risotto
- Pheasant with Shiitake Mushrooms And Garlic
- Deboning a Game Bird
- A Pheasant Hunt
- Acknowledgments
- Index ]]>
SIZE CHART
X-Small -- 15" neck, 22" chestSmall -- 16" neck, 24" chest
Medium -- 17" neck, 26" chest
Large -- 18" neck, 28" chest
X-Large -- 19" neck, 31" chest
XX-Large -- 20" neck, 33" chest
XXX-Large -- 21" neck, 35" chest
How to Measure Your Dog for a Neoprene Dog Vest
It's really important to get the correct fit for your vest. We want it snug on the dog's chest so that it retains body heat while your dogs in the water, but not so tight that it makes running or swimming difficult. HOW TO MEASURE -- To measure your dog you are going to need either a seamstress tape or you can use any sort of piece of string, something you can wrap around the dog and then measure it with a tape measure, or you can even use a leash to get the correct measurement and then measure that off with a tape measure. MEASURE ON A TABLE -- I like to measure the dog standing up on a table. This way I'm standing up, I'm comfortable, and I've got the dog where I can position him correctly. There are two measurements you need when you are sizing your dog for a vest: the chest measurement and then the neck measurement. NECK MEASUREMENT -- The neck measurement is taken lower on the dog's neck than you would measure for a dog collar. A dog collar sits more toward the middle or higher up on the neck, but the vest doesn't go up that high, so take the measurement lower on the neck -- a little bit above the shoulders. CHEST MEASUREMENT -- Have your dog stand. The chest measurement is taken from the deepest part of the chest -- typically closer to behind the front legs. Remember, when you're measuring your dog, the most important size is the chest measurement. It's got to fit the chest tight. Everything else you can cut around, but if you're too small in the chest, you're not gonna be able to put it on your dog. If the neck measurement is off a little bit, you can trim it down to size.CUSTOMIZING TO FIT IS EASY
Dogs are all different shapes and sizes, so it's possible you may have to trim the neck and/or leg holes to get a perfect fit. BAR TACKS STOP FRAYING -- What's nice about these vests is that they have "bar tacks" sewn across the seams so you can customize the neck and leg holes for your dog. When you use scissors to cut the hole larger, normally a seam would just rip and unravel on you. Instead, the bar tack is sewn perpendicular to the seam which stops the seams from shredding. TRIM THE LEG OPENINGS IF TOO TIGHT -- When I'm sizing a vest for my dog, I like to put her in the water first to find out when she's swimming if it's going to be too tight. Make sure that there is not a problem with her legs. CUSTOMIZE THE NECK -- You want the neck snug so it retains heat, but you also don't want to cut the neck opening too low, because it will scoop water as your dog swims. I prefer the neck up a little bit higher, but not where it's in the way. Also, have your dog sit in the vest. Sometimes a vest works fine from a standing position, but when she sits down it's pushing up against her, so we trim a little bit out of here to make that comfortable. There is about an inch between bar tacks, and when you cut you don't have to cut all the way to the next bar tack, but you may get a little fraying. Just customize it to fit your dog better.GET YOUR DOG ACCUSTOMED TO THE VEST
In the above video you can see that is the first time my lab, Flint, has worn any kind of vest. She's a little uncomfortable with it. She doesn't really grasp exactly what it is. You want to fit your dog's vest, and get them used to wearing it while training and working and swimming long before the opening day of the season. Give your dog plenty of time to move around in it, swim in it, sit on a stand or ladder, retrieve a few dummies, and just get used to it. A neoprene vest is just more gear that they're going to be using while we're duck hunting, so just like any other training, give them plenty of time in the vest BEFORE hunting.WHAT IF YOU NEED A VEST NOW AND YOU'RE NOT SURE ABOUT THE SIZE?
Some folks wait until the last minute, and realize they need it now! If you're in a hurry, or if it's late season and it's close to the time that you're gonna need a new vest, the last thing you want to do is get to the duck hole only to find that your new vest doesn't fit. Say you're in between sizes, or just not confident which size your dog really needs, then you may want to order two and try them both out. Return the one that doesn't fit. You only pay return shipping for the vest that didn't fit. If you order a vest that doesn't fit correctly, we will be glad to take it back or do an exchange for you. It's okay that you put it on the dog, but please don't cut or customize it until you're sure the chest fits just right. ]]>
SIZE CHART
X-Small -- 12" neck, 14 - 17" chest, 10 3/4" backSmall -- 15" neck, 19 - 22" chest, 13 3/4" back
Medium -- 18" neck, 25 - 31" chest, 20 1/2" back
Large -- 22" neck, 30 - 37" chest, 24" back
X-Large -- 24" neck, 35 - 43" chest, 29" back
]]>
Directions: Add one tablet each week to your Doggie Dooley after adding water as directed. Add two tablets for two dogs. Cautions: Keep out of reach of children and pets. Wash hands after use. First Aid: In case of skin contact, wash with soap and water. If accidentally ingested, rinse mouth with water and contact a physician. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with water and contact a physician. May cause an allergic type reaction. Contents: Each Tablet contains billions of helpful waste digesting microorganisms which speed the rate of natural waste digestion. Strains are non-pathogenic and beneficial. ]]>
Directions: Add one tablet each week to your Doggie Dooley after adding water as directed. Add two tablets for two dogs. Caution: Keep out of reach of children and pets. Wash hands after use. First Aid: In case of skin contact, wash with soap and water. If accidentally ingested, rinse mouth with water and contact a physician. In case of eye contact, flush eyes with water and contact a physician. May cause an allergic type reaction. ]]>
How to Match Collars to Your Dogtra iQ CliQ System
- To turn the iQ CLiQ into a 2-dog system, start with the handheld transmitter with the stimulation set to level 0. Hold down buttons 1 and 2 simultaneously for 5 seconds. You should now see that the LED indicator is blinking rapidly.
- With the receiver/collar turned off, take the handheld transmitter and hold the two red on/off dots together for 5 seconds. The LED indicator should now be blinking rapidly.
- While both the handheld transmitter and receiver/collar LED indicators are rapidly blinking, press button 2 to code that button to the receiver/collar you desire. The LED indicators on both the handheld transmitter and receiver/collar will blink rapidly for 15 seconds or until they have been coded together.
- When the iQ CLiQ has been coded with an additional receiver/collar, button 1 will function as the Nick and Pulsating Nick stimulation on the first receiver/collar. Button 2 will function as the Nick and Pulsating Nick stimulation on the newly coded second receiver/collar.
- To go back to a 1-dog system, repeat steps 1 and 2. While both the handheld transmitter and receiver/collar LED indicators are rapidly blinking, press button 1 on the handheld transmitter.
- When done correctly, both buttons 1 and 2 will now only operate the one receiver/collar you have coded. To check that the handheld transmitter is coded to the receiver/collar, press a button on the handheld transmitter, and the corresponding receiver/collar LED indicator will blink.
Receiver Weight: 7.2 oz. with strap]]>
Receiver Weight: 7.2 oz. with strap]]>
Receiver Weight: 4 oz. with strap
- Preventing Injury and Illness
- Physical Examination
- Muzzle Application
- Bandaging Techniques
- Surgical Stapling and Gluing
- Allergies/Allergic Reactions
- Animal Pests
- Bleeding and Lacerations
- Bones: Fractures and Dislocations
- Leghold and Head Traps
- Snares
- Breathing Problems: Choking, Coughing, Gagging, Sneezing
- Burns/Scalding
- Collapse and Weakness
- Diarrhea
- Drowning
- Ear Injuries and Problems
- Eye Injuries and Problems
- Foot and Pad Injuries and Problems
- Fish Hook Injuries
- Frostbite
- Gunshot
- Heat Stroke
- Hypothermia/Frostbite
- Insects
- Lameness: Examining and Diagnosing
- Poisons/Carbon Monoxide Poisoning
- Shock
- Snakebite
- Stomach Torsion
- Vomiting
- First Aid Kit/Supplies
- Other Sources of Information
- Dosage Chart
- Introduction
- Calming, Rhythmic Music
- Rhythmic Music with Gunfire (music at higher volume)
- Rhythmic Music with Gunfire (music and gunfire same volume)
- Rhythmic Music with Gunfire (music at lower volume)
- Rhythmic Music with Gunfire (music at even lower volume)
- Rhythmic Music with Gunfire (music volume is almost gone)
- Just Gunfire
- Starfire Suite
- Canon
- Ave Maria
- Largo
- Gavotte
- Jesu Joy of Man's Desiring
- Air on the G String
- Serenade
- Introduction
- Segment 1
- Segment 2 (music masks over gunfire)
- Segment 3 (music at higher volume)
- Segment 4 (music at lower volume)
- Segment 5 (music at lower volume)
- Segment 6 (music at lower volume)
- Segment 7 (music at lower volume)
- Segment 8 Equal Gun and Music
- Segment 9 (music at lower volume)
- Segment 10 (music at lower volume)
- Segment 11 (music is even lower)
- Segment 12 (music is almost gone)
- Segment 13 (music so low you can hardly tell it is there)
- Segment 14 Gun Fire Only
- Let's Review Vol.1
- The Sit Command
- Using Rewards
- Proofing Reliability
- The Down Command
- The Place Command Revisited
- Starting to Work Off Leash
- How to Walk Your Dog
- Remote Collar Basics
- Foundation Training
- Getting Your Dog's Attention
- Adding Vocal Demands
- Old Dog...New Tricks
- The Recall...Teaching Your Dog to Come When Called
- The Place Command
SIZE CHART
Medium -- 16 - 25" neck, 18 - 28" chestLarge -- 18 - 30" neck, 24 - 34" chest
X-Large -- 24 - 35" neck, 28 - 44" chest
]]>
- Neck Size: 9-13"
Chest Girth: 12-18"
- Neck Size: 12-20"
Chest Girth: 16-22"
- Neck Size: 16-25"
Chest Girth: 18-28"
- Neck Size: 18-30"
Chest Girth: 24-34"
- Neck Size: 24-35"
Chest Girth: 28-44"
SIZE CHART
Medium -- 16 - 25" neck, 18 - 28" chest, 25 - 50" weightLarge -- 18 - 30" neck, 24 - 34" chest, 50 - 80" weight
X-Large -- 24 - 35" neck, 28 - 44" chest, 80 - 110" weight
]]>
SIZE CHART
Small -- 12 - 20" neck, 18 - 25" chestMedium -- 16 - 25" neck, 24 - 32" chest
Large -- 18 - 30" neck, 30 - 37" chest
X-Large -- 24 - 35" neck, 35 - 45" chest ]]>
- Neck Size: 9-13"
Chest Girth: 12-18"
- Neck Size: 12-20"
Chest Girth: 16-22"
- Neck Size: 16-25"
Chest Girth: 18-28"
- Neck Size: 18-30"
Chest Girth: 24-34"
- Neck Size: 24-35"
Chest Girth: 28-44"
NOTE: Designed for indoor or outdoor use on a hard, flat surface. Intended to be placed on hard concrete surface. Read the full instructions from the downloadable manual below.
Features:
Sizing:
NOTE: Measuring your dog is the most accurate way to determine the proper harness size. If your dog is between two sizes, choose the smaller.- Girth Measurement: 21-27"
- Girth Measurement: 26-32"
- Girth Measurement: 29-43"
Measuring Instructions:
Fitting Instructions:
For assured Safety, Health Protection, and Disease Avoidance.
Adjustable Water Flow: Before installing, remove filter screen and preset the desired water flow by inserting the appropriate flow control orifice. Use without an orifice for under 10 psi pressure; use the large hole orifice for 10-60 psi pressure; use small hole orifice if over 60 psi pressure.
Animal Training: Simply remove all available water, then show the installed Water Nipple to the animal(s) by moving the nipple control and letting water trickle out. Most animals will immediately start sniffing, nuzzling and licking the hollow water-filled nipple control and learn to drink from it. If not, wait until thirsty and demonstrate again. During the waiting period leave the nipple loosely attached so water will seep past the threads and slowly drip. The dripping water will attract the animal(s) back to the Nipple for self-training. Tighten securely when training is assured.]]>
NOTE: Designed for indoor or outdoor use on a hard, flat surface. Intended to be placed on hard concrete surface. Read the full instructions from the downloadable manual below.
Features:
Sizing:
NOTE: Measuring your dog is the most accurate way to determine the proper harness size. If your dog is between two sizes, choose the smaller.- Girth Measurement: 21-27"
- Girth Measurement: 26-32"
- Girth Measurement: 29-43"
Measuring Instructions:
Fitting Instructions:
- Introduction
- Segment 1 - Conditioning Music Only
- Segment 2 - Music with introduction of Thunder
- Segment 3 - Music with increasing Thunder
- Segment 4 - Music with increasing Thunder
- Segment 5 - Music with increasing Thunder
- Segment 6 - Music with increasing Thunder
- Segment 7 - Music with increasing Thunder
- Segment 8 - Equal Music with equal Thunder
- Segment 9 - Decreasing Music with Thunder
- Segment 10 - Decreasing Music with Thunder
- Segment 11 - Decreasing Music with Thunder
- Segment 12 - Decreasing Music with Thunder
- Segment 13 - Decreasing Music with Thunder
- Segment 14 - Thunder only
- Introduction
- Segment 1 - Conditioning Music Only
- Segment 2 - Music with introduction of Fireworks
- Segment 3 - Music with increasing Fireworks
- Segment 4 - Music with increasing Fireworks
- Segment 5 - Music with increasing Fireworks
- Segment 6 - Music with increasing Fireworks
- Segment 7 - Music with increasing Fireworks
- Segment 8 - Equal Music with equal Fireworks
- Segment 9 - Decreasing Music with Fireworks
- Segment 10 - Decreasing Music with Fireworks
- Segment 11 - Decreasing Music with Fireworks
- Segment 12 - Decreasing Music with Fireworks
- Segment 13 - Decreasing Music with Fireworks
- Segment 14 - Fireworks only
Hey, everybody. Josh Miller here from Riverstone Kennels. Here to talk to you about the RPM walking lead with a snap. Now this lead is gonna obviously give you the ability to snap on to a collar strap and use as a normal lead. But it also adds some versatility in the round material to be able to snap that lead back to itself making it a slip lead. It gives you a number of range options in four, six, and eight feet. So no matter what type of training you're gonna do, this lead is gonna allow you to be able to get that done. This lead is also made out of a material that is waterproof, odor resistant, and cleans off simply with the washcloth. Every RPM product is handmade here in the USA. It's superior products and with everything that they have to offer from material to color to length, these truly are made by dog handlers for dog handlers.]]>
For use with Innotek, PetSafe, and Guardian Pet Containment Systems (see list below). Appearance may vary from photograph.
INPUT: 120V AC 60Hz 0.15AOUTPUT: 12V AC 750mA Fits the following systems: PRF-3004W
PRF-3004W-11
PRF-304W
PIG00-10673
PIG00-10674
PIG00-10773
PIG00-10777
GIG11-10775
MIG00-10938
MIG00-10939
RF-1010-7K
RF-1010M
RF-3004
RF-3004W-11
RF-304W-11
RFA-201
PIG00-11007
MIG00-11013
HIG11-11051
HIG11-11052
GS-1000
SD-2000
SD-3000
RFA-372
GIG11-12112
ZW1890005]]>
For use on SD-2100, SD-2200 and all IUC Pet Containment Systems. Appearance may vary from photograph.
OUTPUT: 24v AC 400mA]]>- PBC00-10677
- PBC-302
- PDBC-300
- PUSB-300
- PUSB-150-19
- PBC19-10765
- PDBC-300-20
- PBC23-10685
- PDT00-10675
- PDT24-10792
- PDT24-10793
- PIG00-10674
- PIG00-10680
- PRF-3004W
- PRF-304W
- PUL-250
- PUL-275
- PRF-3004W-20
- PIG19-10761
- PIG19-10764
- PIG23-10681
- PIG23-10689
- PIF-275-19
- PIF-300
- PIF-300-21
- PWF19-10762
Compatible PetSafe Systems / Collars:
- Containment:
- PIF-300 Wireless Containment System
- PIF-275-19 Extra Wireless Fence Receiver
- PRF-304W Deluxe In-Ground Fence
- PUL-275 Deluxe In-Ground UltraLight Receiver Collar
- PIG00-10777 Stubborn Dog Fence
- PRF-275-19 Stubborn Dog Receiver Collar
- PRF-3004W In-Ground Fence
- PUL-250 In-Ground UltraLight Receiver Collar
- PDLDT-305 Deluxe Little Dog Trainer
- PDBDT-305 Deluxe Big Dog Trainer
- PDT00-10603 Yard & Park Remote Trainer
- PDT00-12470 Yard & Park Remote Trainer
- Containment:
- SDF-100 In-Ground Fence
- SDF-100A In-Ground Fence
- SD-105 Yard Trainer
- SD-350 Yard Trainer
- SD-400 Field Trainer
- SD-425 Field Trainer
- SD-800 Sport Hunter
- SD-825 Sport Hunter
- SD-1225 Sport Hunter
- SD-1325 Sport Hunter
- SD-1825 Sport Hunter
- SD-1875 Upland Hunter
- SD-2525 Pro Hunter
- SD-3225 Hound Hunter
- Works with:
- Guardian GPS Dog Fence
- 1st Generation Guardian GPS Connected Customizable Dog Fence
- Guardian GPS + Tracking Dog Fence
- In-Ground Dog Fences
- Stay + Play or PIF-300 Wireless Dog Fences
- Works with:
- PetSafe Guardian GPS Dog Fence Add-a-dog Collars
- 1st Generation Guardian GPS Connected Customizable Dog Fence
- Guardian GPS + Tracking Dog Fence
- In-Ground Dog Fences
- Stay + Play or PIF-300 Wireless Dog Fences
- Plan your layout
- Install your system
- Place the collar on your pet correctly
- Train your pet (as little as two weeks!)
In Ground Fence Installation Guide and FAQ
Offering safety and portability, the Wireless Instant Fence PIF 300 from PetSafe gives you instant installation. If you can plug in a cord, you can install Instant Fence: no unattractive poles to set up and no wires to bury. Instant Fence uses a constant radio signal to create a "stay zone". When your pet leaves the area, he receives a mild correction until he returns to the containment area or until approximately 35 seconds have passed.
Since Petsafe Instant Fence is completely portable, you can take it and your pet wherever you go. So your pet is safe, and your mind is at ease.
Wireless Dog Fence Features:
Since Instant Fence is completely portable, you can take it and your pet wherever you go. So your pet is safe, and your mind is at ease.
Setting up your Instant Fence takes only minutes. The transmitter plugs into any standard 110 volt outlet. Since the signal can transmit reliably through walls or other household obstructions, it can be placed in any convenient and discreet location in your house, typically a garage or closet. A small dial allows you to adjust the signal area.
Training is simple and easy. Once you have adjusted the signal to the perimeter you want, mark the boundary by placing small training flags at the edge of the signal area.
Then, using a leash and holding the collar, walk your pet around the boundary, pointing and shaking the flags, saying "NO" and letting your pet hear the beeping of the collar.
Next, let your pet wear the collar and walk the boundary again. Let it, on its own, venture into the signal area and get the correction. Quickly pull it back into its yard and praise and play with it, again pointing to the flags and saying "NO". Repeat this process each day for a few weeks and your dog will quickly learn its new boundaries. After thirty days, you can gradually remove the flags.
Petsafe Instant Fence Comparison Chart:
Containment System Installation Guide and FAQ
What's New -- Improvements over the original PetSafe Wireless Fence:
Overview:
The PetSafe Stay and Play Rechargeable Wireless Pet Fence lets you adjust the size of the circular containment boundary for your dog -- up to 3/4 of an acre! The waterproof receiver collar is safe for dogs weighing 5 pounds and up, and fits neck sizes from 6" - 28". Choose between tone-only mode and five levels of static correction. The quick charge collar takes only 2-3 hours to recharge and LED indicators let you know when the battery is getting low. Customize your receiver collar by adding any non-metallic 3/4" collar strap to the receiver. The Stay+Play Wireless Containment System is fully compatible with both the original Petsafe PIF-300 and the Free 2 Roam Wireless Containment Systems. Current PIF-300 owners can expand their wireless coverage with the Stay and Play transmitter or take advantage of the lightweight, rechargeable receiver collar.How the Stay + Play Wireless Dog Fence Works:
The Petsafe Stay and Play provides the safest, simplest form of pet containment ever. You plug in the transmitter in an inconspicuous location in your home, and it emits a radio signal around your house. Your dog wears a lightweight receiver collar which listens for the signal. While it's receiving the signal, your dog is free to run and play. When the collar approaches the boundary of the signal area, it gives your dog a warning beep. If your dog continues, he receives a light static energy pulse which is startling but not harmful. With a little training that is simple and quick, your pet quickly learns his boundaries. Setting the boundaries of your yard takes only a few minutes by adjusting the range on the transmitter, from a radius of just a few feet to up to 105 feet.Stay and Play Wireless Containment System Features:
System Includes:
Rechargeable Wireless Receiver Collar:
Wireless Stay+Play Containment Transmitter:
Training is Simple and Easy:
Stay and Play is Portable:
Manufacturer FAQs:
1. Will the PetSafe Stay + Play Wireless Fence cover a larger circle than 210 feet across?- You can use another wireless transmitter with overlapping boundaries of at least 5-10 feet to increase the size of the pet area.
- Yes. There is no limit to the number of pets you can contain with the Stay + Play Wireless Fence. You must purchase an additional Wireless Pet Fence Receiver Collar for each pet.
- Yes. You may use any 3/4 inch, non-metallic collar.
- To charge the receiver collar, lift and slide the receiver collar strap away from the front of the unit. Lift the rubber plug to allow access to the receiver charge jack. The rubber plug needs to remain attached to the receiver collar.
Plug the receiver charger into the receiver charge jack on the receiver collar. The receiver charge jack and receiver charger are keyed to fit one way. Do not force it in backwards.
The receiver collar light will glow red when the receiver charger is properly seated into the receiver charge jack. The light will turn green when charging is complete. A built-in safety circuit prevents the receiver collar from overcharging.
- Check your pet's neck daily for irritation from the contact points.
- Check the contact points on the receiver collar weekly to make sure they are clean.
- Use the contact point wrench to make sure the contact points are secure. Do not over tighten.
- Check the fit of the receiver collar weekly.
- The receiver indicator light acts as a battery status indicator, flashing red every 4 to 5 seconds when battery charging is required.
Containment System Installation Guide and FAQ
What's New -- Improvements over the original PetSafe Wireless Fence:
Overview:
The PetSafe Stay + Play Wireless Pet Fence lets you adjust the size of the circular containment boundary for your dog up to 3/4 acre. The waterproof receiver collar is safe for dogs weighing 5 pounds and up and fits neck sizes from 6" - 28". Choose between tone-only mode and five levels of static correction. LED indicators let you know when the battery is getting low. Customize your receiver collar by adding any non-metallic 3/4" collar strap to the receiver. The Stay + Play Replaceable Battery Wireless Containment System is fully compatible with both the original Petsafe PIF-300 and the Stay + Play Rechargeable Battery Wireless Containment Systems. Current PIF-300 owners can expand their wireless coverage with the Stay + Play Replaceable Battery transmitter or take advantage of the lightweight, rechargeable receiver collar.How the Stay + Play Wireless Dog Fence Works:
The Petsafe Stay + Play Replaceable Battery provides the safest, simplest form of pet containment ever. You plug in the transmitter in an inconspicuous location in your home, and it emits a radio signal around your house. Your dog wears a lightweight receiver collar which listens for the signal. While it's receiving the signal, your dog is free to run and play. When the collar approaches the boundary of the signal area, it gives your dog a warning beep. If your dog continues, he receives a light static energy pulse which is startling but not harmful. With a little training that is simple and quick, your pet quickly learns his boundaries. Setting the boundaries of your yard takes only a few minutes by adjusting the range on the transmitter, from a radius of just a few feet to up to 105 feet.Stay + Play Wireless Containment System Features:
System Includes:
Wireless Receiver Collar:
Containment Transmitter:
Training is Simple and Easy:
Stay + Play is Portable:
Petsafe Wireless Fence Comparison Chart:
Manufacturer FAQs:
1. Will the PetSafe Stay + Play Wireless Fence cover a larger circle than 180 feet across?- You can use another wireless transmitter with overlapping boundaries of at least 5-10 feet to increase the size of the pet area.
- Yes. There is no limit to the number of pets you can contain with the Stay + Play Wireless Fence. You must purchase an additional Wireless Pet Fence Receiver Collar for each pet.
- Yes. You may use any 3/4 inch, non-metallic collar.
- Check your pet's neck daily for irritation from the contact points.
- Check the contact points on the receiver collar weekly to make sure they are clean.
- Use the contact point wrench to make sure the contact points are secure. Do not over tighten.
- Check the fit of the receiver collar weekly.
- The receiver indicator light acts as a battery status indicator, flashing red every 4 to 5 seconds when battery replacement is required.
Containment System Installation Guide and FAQ
What's New -- Improvements over the original PetSafe Wireless Fence:
Overview:
The PetSafe Stay and Play Rechargeable Wireless Pet Fence lets you adjust the size of the circular containment boundary for your dog -- up to 3/4 of an acre! The waterproof receiver collar is safe for dogs weighing 5 pounds and up, and fits neck sizes from 6" - 28". Choose between tone-only mode and five levels of static correction. The quick charge collar takes only 2-3 hours to recharge and LED indicators let you know when the battery is getting low. Customize your receiver collar by adding any non-metallic 3/4" collar strap to the receiver. The Stay+Play Wireless Containment System is fully compatible with both the original Petsafe PIF-300 and the Free 2 Roam Wireless Containment Systems. Current PIF-300 owners can expand their wireless coverage with the Stay and Play transmitter or take advantage of the lightweight, rechargeable receiver collar.How the Stay + Play Wireless Dog Fence Works:
The Petsafe Stay and Play provides the safest, simplest form of pet containment ever. You plug in the transmitter in an inconspicuous location in your home, and it emits a radio signal around your house. Your dog wears a lightweight receiver collar which listens for the signal. While it's receiving the signal, your dog is free to run and play. When the collar approaches the boundary of the signal area, it gives your dog a warning beep. If your dog continues, he receives a light static energy pulse which is startling but not harmful. With a little training that is simple and quick, your pet quickly learns his boundaries. Setting the boundaries of your yard takes only a few minutes by adjusting the range on the transmitter, from a radius of just a few feet to up to 105 feet.Stay and Play Wireless Containment System Features:
System Includes:
Rechargeable Wireless Receiver Collar:
Wireless Stay+Play Containment Transmitter:
Training is Simple and Easy:
Stay and Play is Portable:
Petsafe Wireless Fence Comparison Chart:
Manufacturer FAQs:
1. Will the PetSafe Stay + Play Wireless Fence cover a larger circle than 210 feet across?- You can use another wireless transmitter with overlapping boundaries of at least 5-10 feet to increase the size of the pet area.
- Yes. There is no limit to the number of pets you can contain with the Stay + Play Wireless Fence. You must purchase an additional Wireless Pet Fence Receiver Collar for each pet.
- Yes. You may use any 3/4 inch, non-metallic collar.
- To charge the receiver collar, lift and slide the receiver collar strap away from the front of the unit. Lift the rubber plug to allow access to the receiver charge jack. The rubber plug needs to remain attached to the receiver collar.
Plug the receiver charger into the receiver charge jack on the receiver collar. The receiver charge jack and receiver charger are keyed to fit one way. Do not force it in backwards.
The receiver collar light will glow red when the receiver charger is properly seated into the receiver charge jack. The light will turn green when charging is complete. A built-in safety circuit prevents the receiver collar from overcharging.
- Check your pet's neck daily for irritation from the contact points.
- Check the contact points on the receiver collar weekly to make sure they are clean.
- Use the contact point wrench to make sure the contact points are secure. Do not over tighten.
- Check the fit of the receiver collar weekly.
- The receiver indicator light acts as a battery status indicator, flashing red every 4 to 5 seconds when battery charging is required.
Containment System Installation Guide and FAQ
| Boundary Wire Chart | |
| Acres | Approximate Feet of Wire Needed |
| 1/4 | 415 |
| 1/3 | 480 |
| 1/2 | 590 |
| 1 | 835 |
| 2 | 1180 |
| 5 | 1870 |
| 10 | 2800 |
Features:
System Includes:
Collar Fit:
Place the Receiver Collar on your dog with the receiver hanging directly beneath your dog's neck. Adjust the collar securely so that the contact points touch the skin of your dog's neck. Make sure the collar is not so tight as to cause discomfort. When the collar is properly adjusted, you should be able to place one finger between a contact point and your dog's skin.Anti-Linger Prevention:
The Anti-Linger Prevention feature keeps your dog from staying in the Warning Zone for long periods of time and draining the Receiver Collar rechargeable battery. Your dog will hear a two second warning tone when he reaches the Warning Zone. If your dog does not return to the Pet Area after two seconds, he will receive a continuous Static Correction until he returns to the Pet Area.Run Through Prevention:
In YardMax Mode when your dog crosses over the wire and passes the Warning Zone, Static Correction is activated at a variable distance dependent on the height of the dog and the height of the receiver activation distance setting. For example, a dog 2.5 feet tall with activation height 1.5 feet above his neck would detect a warning tone distance of about 2.5 feet before Run-Through Prevention would occur. In Traditional Mode, this system includes a unique "run-through" prevention so that your dog cannot escape the Pet Area without receiving an increased level of Static Correction. The Receiver Collar automatically increases the Static Correction when your dog continues more than 20% of the way through the Warning Zone. For example, if the signal is detected 10 feet from the wire and your dog enters the Static Correction Zone, this feature is activated when he is approximately 8 feet from the Boundary Wire. Your dog will then receive a Static Correction that is at an increased level corresponding to the Static Correction level setting on the Receiver Collar.Over Correction Protection:
YardMax Mode: In the unlikely event that your pet "freezes" or continues beyond the boundary, the Static Correction duration continues for 15 seconds. The Receiver Collar locks out further Static Correction and the green light will remain on for 10 seconds. The Receiver Collar remains locked out until the pet re-enters the Pet Area. Traditional Mode: In the unlikely event that your pet "freezes" in the Static Correction Zone, this feature limits the Static Correction duration to 15 seconds. While the Receiver Collar locks out further Static Correction, the green light will remain on for 10 seconds.What You'll Need for Installation:
Installing the YardMax Rechargeable In-Ground Fence is normally a weekend project. In addition to this kit, you may need a few additional tools:| Acres | Feet of Wire Needed | Additional Wire & Flag Kits Needed |
|---|---|---|
| 1/4 | 415 | included in system |
| 1/3 | 480 | included in system |
| 1/2 | 590 | 1 |
| 1 | 835 | 1 |
| 2 | 1180 | 2 |
| 5 | 1870 | 3 |
| 10 | 2800 | 5 |
Capacity: Holds 5 lbs. of feed Instructions: When first hatched out your quail chicks have not learned to look for food, therefore, they must be taught to eat. The best method is to place paper towels or GQF's No. 1628 paper (not included) on the floor of the brooder. Put the Plastic Game Bird Feeder in the center of the paper and sprinkle feed all around the feeder. This makes feed readily available and as they run over it, the feed kicked up by their feet causes them to peck at it. The paper towels absorb any moisture from the droppings. The 1628 paper will also deodorize and kill bacteria as well as absorb moisture. After a week the paper towels can be removed as the birds have learned that feed is available at the feeder. This Game Bird Feeder is suitable for all ages of birds. The design of this feeder is on a continuous flow basis, so the oldest feed is eaten first. The narrow feed trough practically eliminates the possibility of droppings in the feed, resulting in healthier and more active birds with fewer losses. ]]>
SIZE CHART
X-Small -- 12" neck, 14 - 17" chest, 10 3/4" backSmall -- 15" neck, 19 - 22" chest, 13 3/4" back
Medium -- 18" neck, 25 - 31" chest, 20 1/2" back
Large -- 22" neck, 30 - 37" chest, 24" back
X-Large -- 24" neck, 35 - 43" chest, 29" back
]]>
- Introduction
- Basic Obedience
- Mouth Problems
- No-Goes
- Line Manners
- Lack of Hunt
- Lack of Style
- Directness
- Sufficient Range
- Popping
- Blinking Birds and Bugging
- Marking Problems
- Aggression
- Special Puppy Concerns
- Force Fetching Problems
- Manners
- Index
- Beginning
- The Hunt
- Introduction to Gun Dogs
- Training Basics
- Richard A. Wolter's Techniques
- Selecting the Correct Puppy
- Adapting to Home
- Preschool Training
- School - Real Work
- Summary of Basic Commands
- Hunt 'Em Up
- Hand Signals in the Field
- Backing
- Bird Release Machine
- Steady to Wing & Shoot
- Acclamation to Gunfire
- Summary of School Training
- Retrieving
- Retrieving in Water
- Summary of Training
- Ending
- Beginning
- Hunting Scene
- Introduction
- Five Stages
- Pre-School
- School
- Force Fetching
- Marking
- Switching
- Handling
- Fetch to Back
- Directional Back
- Overs
- Baseball
- Double "T"
- Nine Cast Drill
- Swim-By
- Around the Clock
- Lining the Channel
- Cheating
- Diversions
- Honoring
- Trailing
- Summary
- Beginning
- The Hunt
- Training Overview
- Basics of a Hunting Retriever
- Introduction to Basic Commands
- Introduction to School
- Making Them into Workers
- Phases of Training
- Introduction to Water
- Retrieving
Slot Dimensions: 7.5"W x 7.5"L x 16"D
Sizing:
NOTE: Measuring your dog is the most accurate way to determine the proper harness size. If your dog is between two sizes, choose the smaller.- Girth Measurement: 21-27"
- Girth Measurement: 26-32"
- Girth Measurement: 29-43"
Measuring Instructions:
Fitting Instructions:
Slides onto E-collar straps only. The included carabiner clip is required to attach to standard dog collars.
The SportDOG Locator Beacon Dog Tracking Light comes with the 3/4" collar strap adapter pre-installed. If you want to use it on a 1" collar strap, just remove the adapter by popping it out of the base.
Features:
Instructions:
SIZING
Measure your dog's CHEST GIRTH for the proper fit
-- the circumference of the body, directly behind your dog's front legs.
If your dog's chest size fits in two sizes (24, 27, 31, or 36), we recommend the SMALLER size for a better fit.
| Size | CHEST GIRTH | |
| X-Small Short | 20" - 24" | |
| X-Small | 20" - 24" | Steve's 23lb. pointer |
| Small | 24" - 27" | Steve's 25 and 28lb. pointers |
| Medium | 27" - 31" | Steve's 55 and 60lb. pointers |
| Large | 31" - 36" | Steve's 85lb German Shepherd |
| X-Large | 36" - 42" | |
| XX-Large | 42" - 47" |
"I have a small dog. Should I choose X-Small Short or X-Small?"
Choose based on the length of your dog:Crude Fat - min - 2.20%
Crude Fiber - max - 0.70%
Moisture - max - 7.10%
Calcium (Ca) - min - 0.25%
Calcium (Ca) - max - 0.75%
Phosphorus (P) - min - 0.18%
Potassium (K) - min - 2.30%
Sodium (Na) - min - 1.75%
Sodium (Na) - max - 2.25%
Magnesium (Mg) - min - 0.04%
Zinc (Zn) - min - 640 mg/kg
Vitamin A - min - 84,340 IU/kg
Vitamin D - min - 15,630 IU/kg
Vitamin E - min - 950 IU/kg
Microorganisms* - min - 16 Million CFU**/gram * = Not recognized as an essential nutrient by the AAFCO Dog Food Nutrient Profiles
** = Colony Forming Units Storage: Store in a dry room at temps. between 4 degrees C and 30 degrees C (40 degrees F and 86 degrees F.) ]]>
"Training the Hunting Retriever ...a new way ...a better way ...the Wildrose Way"
Renowned trainer Mike Stewart, owner of Wildrose Kennels, along with Drake, the DU Dog, have appeared in more than 60 episodes of the Ducks Unlimited TV show "The World of Ducks" demonstrating retriever training methods. Join them and 25 other gun dogs ages 3 1/2 months to 5 years old as they present a low-force, natural program without using electronic training collars, designed for upland and waterfowl hunting retrievers, "The Gentleman's Gundog."
A complete training program in one DVD -- over 2 1/2 hours! It includes 18 lessons and 13 training diagrams from "early starts" to hand signals.
Chapters:
- Training objectives
- Pre-training and pack leadership
- Early starts
- Obedience
- Reading your dog
- Obedience-group work
- Hold conditioning
- Introduction to birds, boats, decoys and guns
- Memories and lining
- The three D's of steadiness
- Marking off the gun
- Back-casts and stop to the whistle
- Diversions
- Hunting cold game
- Circle memory
- Walking baseball
- Transitional training
"Just received my copy of the video. Great job!!!! It is the best training video I have seen to date. I can't wait to use the Wildrose method on my new Wildrose pup." -- Joe C. "You will not believe the results I have been able to get with my dog since Tuesday when I received the DVD. We taught her "back" and ran a couple of memory blinds with a feather bumper for the first time today. I had no doubt that she could do it, but knowing how to do it was another story, and you have helped me to develop that. Thank you so much for your hard work in putting this DVD together. We have watched it three times since Tuesday and are taking notes, and it's like rereading the Bible -- I learn something new each time! I will be watching it over and over." -- Jeff M. "I watched the DVD yesterday, and it is fantastic. As usual, every time you do something it is top-notch. If you all are going to do something you are going to do it right. I could not believe how well thought out the content of this video was." -- Chip L.]]>
Dick LeMaster's observations of the size and shape of duck bills provide an entirely new tool for recognizing species. Dick is an unusually gifted person who has given up a lucrative business in industrial model-building to further his first love, waterfowl. His talent and enthusiasm as a display decoy carver resulted in his first book Wildlife in Wood. His experience in preserving the living qualities of ducks in wood has given Dick knowledge of form, feather arrangement, and color privy to few if any, professionals. With his acute eye and photographic memory, he has observed differences between species that have heretofore been overlooked by professionals. In addition to his bill identification technique, Dick also focuses attention on another unique field identification concept, that of local altitudinal flight stratification. His renditions of heads, wings, and ducks in flight highlight specific differences that further aid identification. All in all, the contents of this booklet represent a significant breakthrough which will prove to be a blessing to the beginning waterfowler and veteran alike. Frank C. Bellrose Wildlife Specialist, Illinois Natural History SurveyFrom the Author: This guide introduces new aids for identifying waterfowl. One identifies the species of duck in hand; the other assists in determining the species in flight. A duck in hand can be identified by the size and shape of its bill. Charts are provided for the user to match a bill in hand with the outlines of the particular species. The full size and shape of the bill is repeated on the pages for each species, along with information to solidify the selection. Juveniles of both sexes have bills that are slightly smaller, but even these will fall within the basic size and shape of the species. Color of the bill is of lesser importance because it will vary with age and season. Although positive identification is provided through this method, it should be understood that every effort should be made to identify a duck before you have it in hand. To aid in flight identification, this method introduces a new dimension -- levels (strata or layer) of flight that the various species fly in over open water, and these are divided into four distinct levels. The study and use of this dimension, coupled with flock characteristics and species markings, will aid your in-flight identification. Through artwork, I have shown only what you should focus your attention on. In flight; the relative shades formed are more apparent than distinctive color and definition. For identifying birds in hand, I have shown only heads and the area on the wing that is of the greatest importance -- all other detail is omitted to avoid confusion. Good luck, and may our paths cross many times. Richard LeMaster ]]>
The Tough Guy automatic float waterer connects to your garden hose and provides consistent fresh water to your dogs at all times. Fence or wall mountable. Easy to clean -- just twist the large drain plug to empty old waste water. Add a drain hose to direct the used water away from the drinking area. It's rust proof, durable, cleans quickly, and is sun resistant. Will not overflow, and no training is required.
Dimensions: 10.25" x 13.5" across, 5.25" deep
Features:
Crude Fat (min.) 8%
Crude Fiber (max.) 4%
Moisture (max.) 10% ]]>
Crude Fat (min.) 8%
Crude Fiber (max.) 4%
Moisture (max.) 10% ]]>
Crude Fat (min.) 5%
Crude Fiber (max.) 4%
Moisture (max.) 10% Produced in a facility that processes other pet food products and ingredients, including peanuts. Trace amounts are possible.]]>
Crude Fat (min.) 5%
Crude Fiber (max.) 5%
Moisture (max.) 10%
Calcium (min.) 1% Produced in a facility that processes other pet food products and ingredients, including peanuts. Trace amounts are possible.]]>
SIZING
Measure your dog's CHEST GIRTH for the proper fit
-- the circumference of the body, directly behind your dog's front legs.
If your dog's chest size fits in two sizes (24, 27, 31, or 36), we recommend the SMALLER size for a better fit.
| Size | CHEST GIRTH | |
| X-Small Short | 20" - 24" | |
| X-Small | 20" - 24" | Steve's 23lb. pointer |
| Small | 24" - 27" | Steve's 25 and 28lb. pointers |
| Medium | 27" - 31" | Steve's 55 and 60lb. pointers |
| Large | 31" - 36" | Steve's 85lb German Shepherd |
| X-Large | 36" - 42" | |
| XX-Large | 42" - 47" |
"I have a small dog. Should I choose X-Small Short or X-Small?"
Choose based on the length of your dog:Front Leg Width (laid flat): 5"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 5" Small: Length: 6"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 6"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 5" Medium: Length: 8"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 8"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 6" Large: Length: 10"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 10"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 7" X-Large: Length: 12"
Front Leg Width (laid flat): 12"
Rear Leg Width (laid flat): 8"]]>
Features:
Features:
The 15 DVDs:
Smartwork is a system I developed over 30 years and is presented in a multimedia format to provide the premier learning tool for aspiring trainers. The three books, Smartwork for Retrievers Volume I: Basics and Transition; Smartwork Volume II: Secrets of the Pros; and SmartFetch constitute the full system. However, to allow ease of learning and a fuller understanding of the material, we provide a growing collection of DVD modules of the system. Each DVD module offers the most detailed and graphically illustrated explanation of the steps of development for your retriever available anywhere! We include all the sequential steps and tips you'll need to do your own training with your dog and develop him or her to the highest level you desire. In addition, in future DVD productions we will be presenting even more instruction beyond that which is contained in our books. Handling, marking, practical hunting applications, and competition-based instruction are all proposed for future productions. The cost of each item has been kept at an affordable level to allow you to expand your library of information at your own pace while giving you the information you need to enjoy the pride of having done it yourself! This will continue to be our commitment to you. NOTE: Because it is important to me that my system is presented as it is intended to be used, we shoot all our own video and do all our own editing and DVD production. No non-dog trainers participate in this process, and that has allowed each presentation to be geared toward the trainer exclusively. No aspect of our information has been watered down, modified, or omitted because of production concerns. Every effort has been made to assure that this program is enjoyable to watch while sparing no effort to provide extensively detailed instruction. --Evan Graham]]>
]]>
Interior Dimensions: 28.9"L x 19.6"W x 26.25"H
Weight: 43 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 33"L x 22.8"W x 26.2"H
Door Opening: 16.5"W x 21.5"H
Weight: 46 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 33"L x 22.8"W x 26.2"H
Door Opening: 16.5"W x 21.5"H
Weight: 46 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 28.5"L x 19.8"W x 25.2"H
Door Opening: 16.5"W x 21.5"H
Weight: 37 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 28.5"L x 19.8"W x 25.2"H
Door Opening: 16.5"W x 21.5"H
Weight: 37 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 20.25"L x 14.25"W x 18"H
Door Opening: 9"W x 12"H
Weight: 20.2 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 20.25"L x 14.25"W x 18"H
Door Opening: 9"W x 12"H
Weight: 20.2 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 35"L x 25"W x 26"H
Door Opening: 14"W x 19"H
Weight: 35 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 30.5"L x 23.875"W x 24.5"H
Door Opening: 14"W x 19"H
Weight: 30 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Interior Dimensions: 38.75"L x 24.75"W x 29"H
Door Opening: 14"W x 19"H
Weight: 41 lbs.
| Dakota 283 Kennel Size Comparison | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Length | Width | Height | |
| G3 Small | 23" | 16" | 18.75" |
| G3 Medium | 31" | 21.5" | 25.5" |
| G3 Large | 35.2" | 24.5" | 26.5" |
| G3 X-Large | 38.5" | 25.5" | 29.5" |
| Crate Medium | 32.625" | 26.125" | 26.375" |
| Crate Large | 37.125" | 27.5" | 27.625" |
| Crate XLarge | 41" | 27.25" | 30.625" |
| Hero | 40.25" | 26" | 30.1" |
| Original Kennebec | 35.2" | 23.75" | 24.25" |
| T1 Low-Profile | 30" | 21.5" | 20" |
| 2D Side Entry | 31" | 21.5" | 29.5" |
Retriev-R-Trainer Instructions
The Retriev-R-Trainer is a practical aid for training retrievers. Training dummies designed for the use with it can be power thrown two to three times farther than hand-thrown dummies. They are useful on land or water. Extra dummies can be used to throw doubles, triples, etc. The Retriev-R-Trainer uses blank power charges for throwing power. The accompanying report eliminates the need for a blank pistol.Maintenance:
User must thoroughly clean the barrel, chamber, and hinge areas with a good gun cleaning solvent after each use. Failure to properly maintain the RRT Launcher may result in serious injury or death. You may purchase the RRT Cleaning Kit to simplify this process. A small amount of gun oil applied to the hinge area after cleaning will help to ensure smooth operation. Cleaning of the chamber can be enhanced by using a .22 caliber wire brush. Also, thoroughly clean and dry the inside of the dummy tube after each launch to be certain that, prior to each time you launch the dummy from your launcher, it is free of debris both internally and externally. Failure to properly maintain the aluminum insert tube in your dummy may result in serious injury or death. A rubber "O" Ring in a grove near the outer end of the barrel provides a seal for the release gases of the power charge. This "O" Ring will wear causing some of the gases to escape, thereby reducing the flight distance of the dummy. Apply a thin coat of Vaseline, or any other lubricant safe for use on rubber components, to prevent drying and cracking of the o-ring. Replacement "O" Rings are available separately.Preparation for Firing:
Launching:
Firmly grasp the launcher handle in one hand with the thumb latch oriented toward the shoulder of the holding arm. The heel of the holding hand should be facing the thumb latch and your fingers should be wrapped firmly around the grip. Your thumb will be closest to the Pull Knob. Bend the elbow slightly and position the launcher about waist high and one foot from your body. Aim about 45° from the horizontal off to your side toward the target area. Pull the firing knob back to its fully extended position and release it to launch.
NOTE: NEVER DRY FIRE your Retriev-R-Trainer!
Cautions and Warnings:
Your RRT Launcher is not a firearm, but the same handling, care, and safety precautions must be exercised. Your Retriev-R-Trainer is provided with certain built-in safety features, but these are not substitutes for safe handling practices, which include the use of ear and eye protection as well as the use of heavy leather gloves.Lipase (Aspergillus Niger var.)
Cellulase (Trichoderm Longibrachtium)
Protease (Ananas Comosus)
Probiotics (Lactobacillus Acidophilus) Contents: A concentrated enzyme blend derived from vegetable sources. Contains a source of live/viable naturally-occurring microorganisms recommended to help support a healthy digestive tract. Weight Amount: Dogs up to 20 lbs. -- 1/4 Teaspoon
21 lbs. - 39 lbs. -- 1/2 Teaspoon
40 lbs. - 79 lbs. -- 3/4 Teaspoon
80 lbs. - 99 lbs. -- 1 Teaspoon
100 lbs. & up -- 1 1/4 Teaspoon 4 oz. per bottle.
Your Dog Has Food Allergies? Read This: There seems to be an epidemic of dogs diagnosed with so-called "food allergies." But is it actually food allergies or is it simply an issue of your dogs inability to digest the food it is being fed? The following article may help eliminate your dog�s symptoms diagnosed as food allergies. Digestive Enzymes There are four main categories of digestive enzymes: amylase, protease, cellulase and lipase. Amylase breaks down carbohydrates, protease helps digest protein, cellulase breaks down fiber and lipase aids in the digestion of fats. These digestive enzymes are naturally produced by your dog but not in nearly the quantity needed to digest most of today's commercial dog foods which contain even higher amounts of protein, fats and fiber. It is my opinion that the "race" to see who can add the most protein, fat and fiber to commercial dog food may actually be a cause of what is being diagnosed as food allergies. Your dog needs enzymes and bacteria to digest food and in the past some of these enzymes could be found in the food itself. Unfortunately, many natural enzymes and bacteria found in today's dog food ingredients are killed during the manufacturing process. Without these necessary elements, the nutrients needed to keep your dog's skin, organs and coat healthy may be missing, once again adding to the symptoms diagnosed as food allergies. The Role of Digestive Enzymes Digestive enzymes and an assortment of beneficial bacteria and yeast (probiotics) are needed to break down and transport food nutrients in the body. Killed at temperatures above 118 to 170 degrees, live/viable digestive enzymes are not available in commercial dog foods. Enzymes are catalysts, which mean they cause an internal action without themselves being destroyed or changed in the process. Each enzyme acts on a specific food and one cannot be substituted for another. In the absence of these nutritional workhorses, the dog's ability to utilize the food it receives is greatly diminished. Food enzymes also do a portion of the job of pre-digestion, leaving our dog's body a sufficient supply of metabolic enzymes to draw on for maintaining and strengthening the many other bodily systems. As a result, the immune system, digestive system, hormonal glands and organs are in their optimum working order. Digestive enzymes are secreted along the gastrointestinal tract and break down foods, enabling the nutrients to be absorbed into the blood-stream for use in various bodily functions. There seems to be a finite reservoir of enzymes in the body. If various organs and glands are continually robbed of their own enzymes, which must be utilized to digest food, then eventually the body breaks down. A good enzyme supplement maximizes the nutritional value of any diet by optimizing digestion and the absorption of nutrients. The more enzymes we provide, the more digestion will occur. Mendota Pet provides a product with live/active digestive enzymes and probiotics. By simply top feeding this natural product over your dog's food it may eliminate the symptoms diagnosed as food allergies. Taking enzyme supplements helps prevent depletion of the body's own enzymes and thus reduces the stress on the dog's body. Your dog's overall health and quality of life will be increased. As an added bonus these enzymes also work together with the coenzymes, vitamins and minerals, greatly increasing vitamin and mineral utilization and assist in proper metabolic function. --Tim Fisher, CEO / Founder, Retrieve Health
Save up to 20% on closeouts, open box items, and more!
"Once they're gone, they're GONE!"
- Condition the antler shape with the Dog Bone Retrieving antler. It's soft and familiar (same material as other dummies) and assures a positive first experience.
- Teach scent by adding the included Dog Bone Antler Scent to the retrieving antler.
- Replace the dummy antler with a real shed antler, adding the Antler Scent for familiarity.
]]>Before you do anything else -- measure your dog's neck!
Just watch the video. Measure your dog's neck. It'll save you the hassle of returning a collar that doesn't fit!
What's the difference between "Neck Sized" and "Collar Sized?"
- Most of the collars we sell are "Neck Sized" or "NS" collars. NS collar sizes are determined by measuring from the center of the buckle to one of the adjustment holes. When you measure your dog's neck for an NS collar, that measurement IS the collar size you need.
- A few of our collars are "Collar Sized" or "CS" collars. Their sizes are measured from the buckle to the tip or end of the collar. To properly fit a CS collar, you should add 4-5 inches to your dog's measured neck size to determine which collar size you need.
Your lost dog can't call you.
All of our collars include a FREE stamped brass ID name plate. You can include your name, address, phone numbers, or anything else you feel is pertinent to your dog being returned if they go missing. We stamp your name plates in-house and attach them with rivets to your dog’s collar by hand. That way they won’t jingle or make noise, and are much less likely to come off. Need to fit more info? Add an additional name plate or a medical alert tag. We have countless customer success stories of a lost dog being returned as a direct result of having a name plate!
What collar material is best?
Does your dog get wet... a LOT? Get a waterproof collar!
- Biothane Collars: By far our favorite collar material is Biothane. Biothane feels a lot like leather but without the issues associated with natural materials. It's a vinyl-coated webbing that is durable, flexible, stink-proof, doesn't tangle in longer coats, is easy to clean, and doesn't mold or mildew like leather can. Our "BIG DAWG" Biothane collars are made right here at Gun Dog Supply. BIG DAWG collars come in multiple colors, sizes, and styles (see our style comparison below). For puppies and small dogs we offer the Little DAWG, and for those who prefer brass hardware, we have the Big Dawg BRASS series. For added visibility in low light, check out the Big Dawg VISIBILITY reflective collars.
- Day Glow Collars: Day Glow material is plastic-coated nylon. It is more rigid than Biothane with all of the same benefits -- durable, odor-resistant, and easy to clean. Day Glow collars come in multiple styles and colors, as well as reflective and beaded models.
- Wigwag Collars: A third waterproof option is Wigwag collars, which are made from durable injection-molded thermoplastic polyurethane, making them softer and more resistant to cracking. They feature brass hardware and come in a variety of colors and sizes.
If your dog stays mostly high and dry, a leather or nylon collar might be right for you.
- Leather: Natural, classic, and stylish -- we offer a variety of leather collars at several different price points. Leather is one of the world's strongest materials and lasts a long time when taken care of properly. On the downside, you have to care for leather collars a little more, especially if you're working your dogs in water. Some dog trainers prefer leather collars because they don't pull on your dog's neck like nylon or other synthetic materials. Our "Signature" leather collars are our favorite and include our BEST-SELLING dog collar. They have a center-ring design and feature solid brass hardware.
- Nylon: Nylon is very durable, especially our 2-ply nylon collars. Choose from standard, center-ring, and quick-release options, which have the added versatility of being easily adjustable -- great for growing puppies!
What style of collar should I get?
There are four main styles of collars that we offer: Standard, Center-Ring / O-Ring, D-End, and Adjustable Quick-Release.
- Standard collars are designed like a man’s belt. They usually have a metal "D" ring where you can attach a leash. It’s your classic and most common dog collar design.
- Center-Ring / O-Ring collars have a metal ring in the middle which allows the collar to flex more than the material alone would naturally. If your dog gets hung on something, this extra flexibility enables them to potentially free themselves. This is why they are sometimes called "safety collars." The center ring can also be used to attach a leash. A "double-ring collar" is a center-ring collar that also has a separate "D" ring for leash attachment.
- D-End collars are designed where the "D" comes before the buckle. It's our most secure design for use with a leash since your dog actually pulls against two layers of collar material. If they somehow manage to pull the D ring loose, they still won't get free. It’s the best design for hard-pulling dogs.
- Adjustable quick-release collars are typically nylon. They're a good choice for puppies and growing dogs, or for situations where you need to quickly or frequently put on and remove your dog's collar.
- Most of the whistles we sell are made of high density plastic. We also have a few styles in metal.
- These whistles are all well-made, high-end products. These whistles are not only the standard in dog training but they are also used around the world by professional and amateur referees for all major sporting events.
- Whistles With a Pea -- Many of the dog whistles we sell have a "pea." The pea is the cork ball inside the whistle. Having a pea allows you to "trill" the whistle and make different combinations of sounds.
- A Pealess whistle is designed for extreme cold weather. The pea in a whistle can freeze from the saliva that gets on it at sub-zero temperatures. Pealess whistles also tend to be better at making quick blasts of sound.
- Mega Horns -- These whistles have a small megaphone built around them to increase the volume and distance that your dog can hear them. What the mega does is push the sound away from the handler and out toward the dog. These are very loud whistles, but they are easier on your ears because of the design.
- Protect your hearing: All of the whistles that we sell are loud and any long-term exposure to loud sounds can damage your hearing. That said, most folks don't use a whistle enough to do any major damage. We do recommend that you be careful how you use your dog training whistles.
What a Dog Whistle Will NOT Do
The whistles we sell are for training dogs. They are used to issue commands and get your dog's attention.Silent Whistles
"Silent" Whistles work just like any other whistles -- you blow through them and they make a noise. It is called a "silent whistle" because it operates on a frequency above that of the average person's hearing. You will hear something, but not much. A few people can hear the actual tone, but most folks just hear the sound of the air going through the whistle.
The idea behind this type of whistle is that it will not disturb anyone standing right there with you. Dog's hearing goes further into the ultrasonic range than people's so they can hear these whistles. In other words, it is very LOUD to dogs but very QUIET to people. The whistles are tunable so that you can tune it to a frequency that gets the most response from your dog.
The Acme Silent Dog Whistle produces ultra high frequencies in the range of 5800 Hz to 12,400 Hz. You can read more about it and even hear a sample here. The silent whistle has the longest range of the whistles we carry.
SportDOG Roy Gonia Whistles and MEGA Whistles
Roy Gonia whistles have been the standard in Retriever Training for the last 30 years. We recommend the Roy Gonia Special Whistle for use with young pups and for short-distance training, as it is lower-pitched and not as loud as the other whistles.
The Roy Gonia Mega Whistle has a plastic megaphone that is attached to the regular Gonia whistle. What the mega does is push the sound away from the handler and out toward the dog. These are very loud whistles, but they are easier on your ears because of the design.
Fox 40 Whistles for Dog Training
The Fox 40 Classic Whistle is designed to be heard above all kinds of noise including breaking waves and thundering gale-force winds. The Fox 40 Classic's chambers are designed to self-clear when submerged in water. The Fox 40 Classic is a pealess design and has no moving parts to freeze or jam. It is an easy to blow, super loud whistle.
Acme Thunderer and Oblong Whistles
Acme Whistles have been made in England since the late 1800s. They are the oldest whistle company in the world. Acme has pioneered the majority of whistle manufacturing techniques used today.
The Acme Thunderer is our number one pointing dog whistle. I grew up using the plastic 558 and 559 as my main training whistles. The Acme Thunderer Metal Whistles are also staples in the bird dog world.
Acme Oblong Whistles are a favorite of close working retriever trainers and flushing dog owners. These whistles are very easy on the handler's ears and are popular in situations when you don't need extreme volume.
How to Train With a Whistle
A pretty common misunderstanding by the general public is that dogs will automatically respond to a whistle with no training. A dog that knows his verbal commands will usually pick up whistle signals very quickly. If your dog will not obey your verbal commands, there is no reason to think he will obey whistle commands. Without training, these whistles are like any other noise to your dog. A whistle command is a cue just like a verbal command. Whistle training is achieved by overlaying the whistle command once the verbal command is mastered. The first thing you need to do is pick out a standard set of whistle commands. While you can train pretty much any command with a whistle, the normal ones are a recall or "here" command, "sit," and a "change direction" or turn command. The main whistle command in retriever work is the "Sit" whistle, which is normally one quick blast. The here or recall whistle can be three or four quick blasts in rapid succession. I use a long trill for a turn whistle. My field dogs are trained to look at me after the turn command is given, so I can give a hand signal for the correct direction if needed. Just like verbal commands, it really does not matter which whistle commands you use, but you must be consistent in your commands. Training with a whistle is just like regular vocal commands, but after the dog learns the command, you add the whistle command after the verbal command. Let's start with the Sit whistle (one quick blast). You need a dog that has mastered both "heel" and "sit" verbal commands. Start your dog out on a leash in the heel position. As you walk along, give the verbal command "Sit" and then immediately blow the whistle. Your dog will sit. Give him verbal praise. Repeat this over and over: verbal command followed by the whistle command. After you have done a certain amount of this, start to drop the verbal command. Only give the verbal command every other time. Once you can see the dog understanding just the whistle command, you can stop giving the verbal. The same idea applies to all other commands. You will need to have different whistle combinations for every command so that the dog understands which one you want him to do. We always teach commands on a long line or check cord so we have physical control over the dog and can make him do what he needs to complete the command. I don't recommend that most folks teach more than two or three whistle commands. Keep them simple and make sure your dog understands the command before you add the next one.Why worry about fireworks?
- Your dogs could hurt themselves trying to get away from the noise
- Fireworks could unnecessarily create a gun shy or noise sensitivity problem
There is NO REASON for a dog to be around fireworks.
I do everything I can to keep my dogs away from them. Usually, dogs conditioned to gunfire can handle the noise of fireworks, but there really isn't anything good about them as far as dogs are concerned. We sell a couple of products that are designed to help dogs overcome the fear of fireworks, but I really would prefer to NOT have to sell them.Tips for Preventing Firework Sensitivity in Your Dogs
- Ideally, keep your dogs as far away from fireworks as possible
- Check with your neighbors about their fireworks plans and ask for a phone call before they start
- Walk your dog beforehand because it might be a while before it's safe for them to go back outside
- If possible, bring your dogs inside in a closed-off, interior room
- Feed your dogs ahead of time; anxious dogs are often too upset to eat
- Fill up their water bowl as anxious dogs pant more and become thirsty
- Make sure you have a safe and comfortable place for them to be while the fireworks are going on
- Close windows and blinds in order to block the bright lights from startling your dog
- Have a TV, radio, or white-noise maker to drown out the sound of the fireworks
- Distract your dog with a favorite toy or bone
- Reward good, calm behavior
- Comfort and reassure your dogs that everything is all right
- Act normal and don't react negatively to the fireworks; dogs can pick up on behavioral cues
- Don't make your dogs "face their fears" -- this will only frighten them more
- If you need to go outside, make sure your dogs are secure before opening the door
Before the Fireworks Begin:
During the Fireworks:
Fireworks Rarely Last Just One Day
Fireworks happen twice a year on New Year's Eve and July Fourth, and they frequently occur a few days before and after each holiday. You might want to condition your dogs to fireworks, especially if you live where your dogs will be exposed a couple of weeks out of the year. It never hurts to check with your neighbors about their fireworks plans. Give them a heads up that you have a dog and ask them to give you a call before they start.Noise Shy Does NOT Equal Gun Shy
Just because a dog is noise-sensitive to fireworks, does NOT necessarily mean that will translate into gunshyness, but why take a chance? My best gun dog ever, Em, never had a problem with gunfire, but she was so afraid of thunderstorms that we had to build a special top for her kennel run so she couldn't climb out or hurt herself trying.How NOT to Expose a New Pup to Fireworks
I was at a party a few years back and watched a new dog get exposed to fireworks completely the wrong way. The dog was in her kennel but still in full view of everything that was going on. Once the fireworks started she became more and more upset and wanted out of the kennel. To calm her down they let her out of her crate and she made a break for it. They didn't find her for two days. The volume and brightness of fireworks is just too much for most dogs and nothing good is going to come from it. Please take the time to protect your pets while the possibility of unexpected explosions is around. I do my best to keep all my dogs away from any kind of fireworks. Even dogs that have been properly conditioned to gunfire can become upset or nervous when exposed to fireworks. It just isn't worth it.Most people don't think about fireworks until it's too late.
The majority of dogs don't have a problem with it, but some do. Why take a chance? No point in stressing your dogs out. Remember, if you want to shoot fireworks, be safe and have fun. Just keep in mind that unexpected noise and stress could create a problem where one doesn't exist. -- Steve]]>Output:10V DC 1.5A
Output: 10V 2.0A
How to Match Collars to Your Dogtra 1900X System
Please read all steps before starting.
NOTE: Restart the pairing steps if the LED on the receiver stays on or flashing for more than 1 second. The pairing between the devices has timed out or failed.]]>
Dogtra 1902S Handsfree PLUS B&L 2-dog Comes With:
Dogtra 1902S 2-dog Handheld:
Dogtra 1902S 2-dog Collar:
Dogtra 1902S 2-dog Stimulation:
Dogtra 1902S 2-dog Batteries:
Dogtra 1902S 2-dog Range:
3/4 mile range, which is ample for most dog training or for hunting with close-working field dogs. Actual range depends on training conditions, including weather, terrain, presence of cover, etc.Dogtra 1902S 2-dog Comes With:
See all the Dogtra 2300 NCP Expandable product details here.
Dogtra 2300 NCP Expandable 2-Dog Comes With:
How to Match Collars to Your Dogtra Expandable System
220V European power supply for the Dogtra e-Fence eF3000 and eF3000 Gold Transmitters only.
Input: 230V AC 50Hz 0.2AOutput: 25V DC 500mA
How to Match Collars to Your T&B DUAL System
Before you begin configuring the transmitter, determine how you want to use your system:- 1-dog System or 2-dog System
- Front or Side buttons for Dog 1
One Dog Transmitter Setup:
Two Dog Transmitter Setup:
The screen will show that both ‘Dog 1’ and ‘Dog 2’ have been set up. If you want to switch buttons, start over by going back to step 1.
Collar Setup:
How to Match Collars to Your 2700 T&B Expandable System
Dogtra 2702 T&B Beeper Collar Comes With:
How to Match Collars to Your Dogtra 280X or 200iQ System
Please read all steps before starting.
How to Match Collars to Your 3500X System
Before you begin configuring the transmitter, determine how you want to use your system:- 1-dog System or 2-dog System
- Front or Side buttons for Dog 1
Transmitter Setup:
Collar Setup:
Output: 5V 0-1.0 A
How to Match Collars to Your ARC System
Instructions for 2-dog systems are below. Please read all steps before starting.1st Dog Code Setting:
2nd Dog Code Setting:
Specifications
Comes With
Features
Transmitter
Remote Controller
How to Match Collars to Your ARC Plus System
Instructions for 2-dog systems are below. Please read all steps before starting.1st Dog Code Setting:
2nd Dog Code Setting:
Dogtra ARC Handsfree PLUS 2-dog Comes With:
How to Match Collars to Your Dogtra ARC-X System
Please read all steps before starting.
NOTE: Restart the pairing steps if the LED on the receiver stays on or flashing for more than 1 second. The pairing between the devices has timed out or failed.]]>
Comes with:
Training is Easy:
Dogtra e-Fence 2-dog Comes With:
Overview:
The Dogtra E-Fence 3500 is an easy-to-use containment system that will keep your dog safe and secure. The underground wire contains your dog without conventional fencing that can be chewed through or jumped over. The stimulation field can be adjusted with the transmitter. The Function Selection Switch allows you to quickly change from pager/vibration to corrective stimulation with the flip of a switch:- In Pager + Stimulation Mode your dog will receive vibration before stimulation when approaching field boundaries.
- In Pager Only Mode your dog will receive a non-stimulating vibration only.
System Includes:
E-Fence 3500 Containment Transmitter:
E-Fence 3500 Receiver Collar:
Training is Easy:
Additional Flag and Wire Kits Needed
| Acres | Feet of Wire Needed | Additional Wire & Flag Kits Needed |
|---|---|---|
| 1/4 | 415 | included in system |
| 1/3 | 480 | included in system |
| 1/2 | 590 | 1 |
| 1 | 835 | 1 |
| 2 | 1180 | 2 |
| 5 | 1870 | 3 |
| 10 | 2900 | 5 |
How to Match Collars to Your EDGE System
Please read all steps before starting.
How to Change the Location Light Color on Dogtra EDGE Receiver Collars
Please read all steps before starting.
NOTE: The location light color will reset to the corresponding button color if re-synchronized to the transmitter.]]>
Dogtra Edge 2-dog Comes With:
Dogtra Edge 3-dog Comes With:
Dogtra Edge 4-dog Comes With:
How to Match Collars to Your EDGE RT System
Please read all steps before starting.
Dogtra Edge RT 2-dog Comes With:
Dogtra Edge RT 3-dog Comes With:
FREE Dogtra GPS Fence App for Setup and Alerts:
- No subscription required and no monthly fees
- App required only for initial setup
- After setup, the collar works on its own without the App
- Get alerts and updates in the App when the collar is within Bluetooth range (approx. 33 ft.)
- Outside of Bluetooth range the collar works but without alerts
Features:
- GPS virtual fencing with custom and circular shapes
- Create up to 30 custom fences with the Dogtra app for multiple locations and occasions
- Each fence has a main boundary + two backup boundaries
- Multiple "Come Home" Sequences with Return Reminder Tone
- Does not correct your dog upon re-entry to the fenced area
- No installation necessary
- Dual-band GPS chip for added accuracy
- Warning zone to alert your dog before correction
- Tone, vibration, and static stimulation options
- Pair up to 3 dogs
- IPX9K waterproof rating
- Rechargeable battery
"Come Home" Sequence:
- Warning Zone: Collar emits reminder tone
- Boundary Zone: Collar gives correction
- Beyond Boundary Zone: Triggers periodic Return Reminder Tone
- Backup Fence 1: Collar gives second correction sequence
- Backup Fence 2: Collar gives final correction sequence and Return Reminder Tone continues
- Collar gives no correction when your dog returns to the containment zone
Specifications:
- Dimensions without strap: 3" x 1 5/8" x 1 3/8"
- Weight with strap: 6.4 oz.
- 3/4" collar strap fits approx. neck sizes 10-19 in.
- Fits dogs 15 lbs. and above
- Covers 3/4 acre and up
- Requires iOS 14 and up, Android: 7.0 and up, Bluetooth 5.0 and up
Comes With:
- Dogtra GPS Fence collar
- Battery charger (5mm / USB cable)
- Quick Start Manual
- Flag Training Manual (flags not inluded)
How to Match Collars to Your JUST RIGHT System
Please read all steps before starting.
How to Match Collars to Your Pathfinder System
1. Start with the collar turned off.
5. Release the button.
How to Match Collars to Your Pathfinder System
1. Start with the collar turned off.5. Release the button.
How to Match Collars to Your Pathfinder System
1. Start with the collar turned off.5. Release the button.
How to Match Collars to Your Pathfinder System
1. Start with the collar turned off.5. Release the button.
- Count Only
- Pager (vibration) Only
- Auto Increase STIM
- Fixed Level STIM (choose from 10 levels)
- 30-yard short range
- Medium-power output
- 100 levels of nick or continuous STIM plus vibration
- Run/Point -- (R) beep every 7 seconds, (P) beep every 2 seconds
- Point Only -- (R) silence, (P) beep every 2 seconds
- Run/Point BEEP -- (R) beep every 7 seconds, (P) beep every 2 seconds
- Point Only HAWK -- (R) silence, (P) hawk every 2 seconds
]]>
Easily attaches to the body of the Dokken Mallard or full size duck for added realism. Made in the USA.]]>
Easily attaches to the body of the Dokken Goose for added realism. Made in the USA.]]>2. Knots need to be separated and must be facing hook.
3. Ring must be attached to hook on dummy for casting.
4. Please note assembly when opening so rubber bands can be replaced and product reassembled. Product requires 2 rubber bands for proper operation. If bird releases too easily, tuck knots further into foam slot.]]>
DT Bark Boss Features
- Rechargeable 6V Lithium battery with 2-3 hour quick charge
- STIM Level / Tone Mode Dial on collar
- Eight easily adjustable levels of STIM plus Tone-Only mode
- All STIM levels feature a warning tone before stimulation
- 3/4" black nylon quick-release collar strap fits 7" to 27" neck
- For dogs 5 lbs. to 120 lbs.
- Short and long interchangeable contact points included
- Vibration sensor only picks up vocal cord vibrations from your dog
- 100% waterproof
- 1-year manufacturer warranty
- Dimensions: 2"W x 1 1/8"H x 1 1/8"D
- Collar weight: 2.4 oz
DT Bark Boss Comes With
- Rechargeable 6V Lithium battery
- Battery charger with AC adapter
- 3/4" black nylon quick-release collar strap
- Short and long contact points
- Short and long vibration probes
- Test light
- Owner's manual
Synchronizing a Replacement Collar Receiver to your Transmitter
Programming your H2O Collar to match your transmitter:
Programming your H2O Collar to match your transmitter:
Programming your H2O Collar to match your transmitter:
Programming your H2O Collar to match your transmitter:
Compatible with the Following System
Programming your Micro-iDT Collar to match your transmitter:
Programming your Micro-iDT Collar to match your transmitter:
Programming your Micro-iDT Collar to match your transmitter:
Transmitter Weight: .25 oz. including the 9V battery Receiver Size: 2.1/4" T X 1.3/4" W X 1./4" D
Receiver Weight: 4.8 oz. with strap]]>
Programming your MR 1100 to match your transmitter:
Programming your MR 1100 to match your transmitter:
- "Knuckle Grip" -- Strap to the back of your hand to free up both hands and have a quick, no look "hot button"
- "Palm Grip" -- Hold in the palm of your hand like a stopwatch
- "Pistol Grip" -- More traditional hold with your thumb operating most of the buttons and your trigger finger on the top button
How to Match Additional Collars to Your DT Super Pro Ranger System
Please read all steps before starting.
How to Match Additional Collars to Your DT Super Pro Ranger System
Please read all steps before starting.More from this series: Duck Dog Basics DVD with Chris Akin; Duck Dog Basics 2 -- Basic Handling DVD with Chris Akin; Avery Duck Dog Basics 3-disc DVD Set featuring Chris Akin
Duck Dog Basics III -- Advanced Handling was developed to take you and your dog to the next level of training. Learn advanced handling skills and pattern blind work with one of the top retriever trainers. Chris Akin has achieved numerous accolades in the retriever training community of SRS, AKC, and HRC, and he continues to train hunting companions today. If you have successfully completed Duck Dog Basics and Duck Dog Basics II -- Basic Handling, and you are certain you and your dog have laid the groundwork, then you will be ready for Duck Dog Basics III -- Advanced Handling. Chapters:
- Building the 9 Point and Pattern Water Blinds
- Akin's 9 Point Prep
- 9 Point Drill
- Akin's Answers -- Cold Water
- Akin's Pattern Water Blind Prep
- Pattern Water Blinds
- Akin's Log Drill
- Building the 7 Point Drill
- Akin's 7 Point Prep
- 7 Point Water Drill
- 7 Point With White Bumpers
- 7 Point With Orange Bumpers
- Akin's Answer - Casting Technique
- Building and Developing Pattern Blinds
- 5 Day Land Pattern Blinds
- Akin's Answers
- Difference in Pattern and Cold Blinds
- Advanced Land Pattern Blinds
- Akin's Answers -- The Stadium
- DDB III In Close
"I've been training and hunting with retrievers for well over 30 years. This DVD is the most fun and realistic gun dog training video I've ever seen. Chris is arguably the best competitive dog trainer of our time and just so happens to be a really serious waterfowl hunter. That's a very tough combination to beat." --Justin Tackett, Ducks Unlimited WaterdogChapters:
- Socialization, Laying the Foundation
- Picking a Puppy & Pedigree
- Akin's Answers - What to do with my puppy?
- Fun Bumpers - "Hup Hups", retrieves on land
- Akin's Answers - What do I do with my puppy when I come home?
- Introduction to Water
- Introduction to Covers & Decoys
- Introduction to Birds
- Akin's Answers - Puppy Teeth?
- Introduction to Kennel
- Akin's Answers - When should formal training begin?
- Formal Training - Obedience & Collar Conditioning
- Introduction to Formal Training
- Formal Training - Tools
- Formal Training - Obedience
- Putting on Checkcord
- Heel
- Sit/Stay & Here
- Sit/Stay & Here with a more advanced dog
- Kennel
- E-Collar Conditioning
- Putting on E-Collar
- Heel & Here
- Introduction to Gunfire
- Chapter Three: Force Fetch -- Fetch, Hold and Leave
- Introduction to Force Fetch
- Teaching Force Fetch
- Akin's Answers - Can I continue to throw retrieves during Force Fetch?
- Force Fetch with a more advanced dog
- Force Fetch from the ground
- Walking Fetch
- Chapter Four: Formal Marking - Steady to Singles & Doubles
- Introduction to Formal Marking
- Steady - Singles & Doubles
- Diversions
- Diversions - with a less advanced dog
- Akin's Answers - Socialize to your hunting environment
- Adding Distance
- Adding Birds
- Adding the Gun
- Akin's Answers - Making exceptions with friends and family
- Adding Water
- Akin's Answers - Teaching your dog his place
- Steadying - From the duck blind
- Akin's Answers - Taking the right steps on your pup's first few hunts
- Steadying - From the pit
- Akin's Answers - Pup's first hunt
- Good Luck!
More from this series: Duck Dog Basics DVD with Chris Akin; Duck Dog Basics 3 -- Advanced Handling DVD with Chris Akin; Avery Duck Dog Basics 3-disc DVD Set featuring Chris Akin
A retriever that sits steady and confidently retrieves birds is truly an incredible tool for the hunter. But, it's still only a small part of what these amazing animals can accomplish. It's time to start heading towards the development of the finished retriever. All dogs can learn to handle -- that's right, young or old, 100 percent of retrievers that have a desire to retrieve can become good handling hunting partners. Train your dog to handle with one of the greatest retriever trainers of our generation, Chris Akin. He's the first handler to ever win two SRS Crown Championships, and his amazing run of AKC Master Hunters and HRC Grand Champions may never be equalled. Within Duck Dog Basics 2, Chris takes you through proper e-collar usage while teaching the drills and aspects of basic handling, water honesty and how to positively take your retriever through to the next level. Now, the groundwork has been completed, grab your whistle, a bag of bumpers and let's get to work. Chapters:
- Preparation for the Advanced Duck Dog
- Terms of the Game
- Akins Answers -- Tools Needed
- Fun Drills
- Training grounds
- Akins Answers -- 3-Handed Cast
- Intro to Back Cast and Over Cast
- Building and Developing the Land T
- Preparation for the Land-T
- E-collar Prep
- Force to a Pile & Center Line
- Stop en Route
- Mini T
- Akins Answers -- Land T
- Land T
- Preparation for the Land-T
- Building and Developing the Water T
- Akins Answers -- What is "De-Cheat"?
- "De-Cheat" -- Phase One of "De-Cheat"
- Akins Answers -- Phase Two of "De-Cheat"
- Phase Two of "De-Cheat"
- Water Force
- Water T
- Akins Answers -- 5-Point Drill
- In Close
About Chris Akin
Chris Akin is a duck hunter. His entire career has been built on a love for duck hunting. It wasn't long after high school that Chris figured a way to make a living as close to duck hunting as possible. It was dogs. He began to understand that he had a natural talent to train retrievers, and with time, he developed into one of the very best of our time.
Chris' training style is what many might call unconventional. Unlike just about every other great, Chris' training doesn't fall into a "Rex Carr or Farmer/Aycock" theory. It's all based on a huge number of retrievers trained. It's a safe argument to say that at 41 years old, Chris may have trained more retrievers than anyone in history. With right under 4,000 retrievers going through Webb Footed Kennels over the past 20-plus years, there are very few that can claim to see and actually handle anywhere close to as many retrievers as Chris has. Chris' style is based on a retriever's strengths as his style uses a less-pressure approach. You'll find that Chris uses more "attaboys" and "attagirls" than almost any trainer in the business.
Chris, his wife Janet and children Kristen and Clay live about 100 yards west of Webb Footed Kennels in the northeastern tip of Arkansas in Bono. He's well known for training all seven days of every week, so don't be afraid to stop by and ask questions anytime. ]]>
Save up to 20% on closeouts, open box items, and more!
"Once they're gone, they're GONE!"
Where do I begin?
When choosing an electronic training collar, there are a few factors you should consider. These collars can be a major investment and can provide long-term training for you and your dog, so it's important to pick one that does what you need it to do. The first question to ask yourself is what you're trying to accomplish using your training collar. Are you wanting to do basic obedience training with your dog at home? Are you hunting ducks? Are you upland hunting with big running dogs? Are you running beagles or hounds? The purpose of your interaction with your dogs is the starting point for the e-collars conversation. Knowing what you want can greatly help guide your decision-making process.How much range do I need?
A dog being trained at home for obedience would be fine with a shorter range (less than 1/2 a mile) - rarely are you in a situation where your dog is over half a mile away from you. Dogs that are hunting ducks or may go on off-leash hikes could benefit from a bit more range - 3/4 to 1 mile of range. Longer range collars (over 1 mile) are needed when you're running big running dogs upland hunting or running hounds/beagles in a pack. Now, it's important to remember that these collars operate on line of sight. So, if your dog is through some brush and pretty far off, you may not get that full range.What am I looking for in a training collar?
When picking a collar, it's important to look at the number of levels of stimulation. If you're wanting fine-tuned training from your dog, having more levels of stimulation allows you to find that perfect level of stimulation for your particular dog. Every dog is different, so if you call our customer service line and ask for a product specialist, they won't be able to tell you what level to use for your dog. Instead, they'll all tell you that you should start at the lowest level and work up from there. If you're running hounds and you really just need to stimulate them if they get after undesired prey or get a little farther than they should, you probably don't need 21 levels of stimulation.How many dogs?
The number of dogs you currently have does not necessarily equal the number of dogs you may have or anticipate having in a year or so. If you have one dog with no anticipation of adding another, you can stick with a 1-3 dog system. If you have multiple dogs (2-3) and you're hoping to grow your pack, maybe consider an e-collar with the ability to add more dogs on – dog people tend to acquire more dogs.Our Top Picks
|
Yard Trainers
• Perfect for backyard use.
• Start basic obedience training. • Solve behavior problems fast! • Control your dog off-leash in neighborhood, dog parks or beach. |
Medium Range Collars
• Great for most training situations.
• Great for most any dog breed. • Perfect for most hunting dogs (unless you need longer range or other PRO features). |
Long Range Collars
• Recommended for almost any dog training situation, for example, duck hunting in thick timber, big-running bird dogs.
• Some folks don't need RANGE but want additional features. • Exceptions: Have 4, 5 or 6 dogs? Need 2-mile range? |
||||||||||||
|
Click PICTURES to the right to view PRODUCT pages
→
Click EXPLAIN under the TERMS below to know what we mean
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Innotek |
SportDOG |
|
SportDOG |
Tri-tronics |
SportDOG |
Tri-tronics
|
Tri-tronics |
|||||||
|
|
$139.95
free shipping |
$159.95
free shipping |
$199.95
free shipping |
$239.00
free shipping |
$289.95
free shipping |
$447.00
free shipping |
$509.00
free shipping |
|||||||
|
#3 Best-selling short range system. |
#1 Best-selling short-range system. |
#3 Best-selling medium range system. |
#1 Best-selling dog training collar of ANY system. |
#1 Best-selling long-range system. |
#4 Best-selling long-range system. |
#3 Best-selling long-range system. |
||||||||
|
|
Short (300 yards) |
Short (400 yards) |
Medium (1/2 mile) |
Medium (1/2 mile) |
Long (1 mile) |
Long (1 mile) |
Long (1 mile) |
|||||||
|
Comes with
|
Collar. Remote. Carrying case. Free lanyard. |
Collar. Remote. Training DVD. Training book. Free lanyard. |
Collar. Remote. Training DVD. Training book. Free lanyard. Belt-clip. |
Collar. Remote. Training DVD. Training book. Free holster. Free lanyard. |
Collar. Remote. Training DVD. Training book. Free lanyard. Belt-clip. |
Collar. Remote. Training DVD. Training book. Free holster. Carrying case. |
Collar. Remote. Training DVD. Training book. Free holster. Carrying case. |
|||||||
Innotek |
SportDOG |
|
SportDOG |
Tri-tronics |
SportDOG |
Tri-tronics
|
Tri-tronics |
|||||||
|
Steve Says:
|
"The ADV-300 is the cheapest collar I recommend, but if you've got the extra $20, just buy an SD-400." | "The SD-400 has an extremely wide range of STIM for short-range collar." | "Want to save $40? The SD-800 is a great alternative to the best-selling SPORT BASIC." | "The SPORT BASIC is a best-seller because it works for 95% of the folks who need a training collar." | "The SD-1825 is my new favorite e-collar. It's what I use for training my retrievers and my bird dogs" | "Pro 200 is opposite. 6 continuous, 18 momentary." | "Think of the PRO500 as a PRO100 and a PRO200 stuck together." | |||||||
|
|
READ FULL REVIEW | READ FULL REVIEW | READ FULL REVIEW | READ FULL REVIEW | READ FULL REVIEW | READ FULL REVIEW | READ FULL REVIEW | |||||||
|
|
1 mode | 7 modes | 7 modes | 1 mode | 13 modes | 1 mode | 1 mode | |||||||
Multiple Dogs/ Expandable EXPLAIN |
1 dog
not expandable |
up to 3 dogs* * some loss of features |
up
to 3 dogs* * some loss of features |
up
to 3 dogs
no loss of features |
up
to 3 dogs*
* some loss of features | up
to 3 dogs
no loss of features | up
to 3 dogs
no loss of features |
|||||||
|
|
tone | tone | tone | buzz | tone + vibration | tone | tone | |||||||
|
|
normal |
extra-wide | extra-wide | wide | extra-wide | extra-wide | extra-wide | |||||||
|
|
7 levels | up to 16 levels | up to 16 levels | 10 levels | up to 16 levels | 18 levels | 18 levels | |||||||
|
|
7 levels | up to 8 levels | up to 8 levels | 10 levels | up to 16 levels | 6 levels | 18 levels | |||||||
Charger
EXPLAIN |
slow (12 hours) |
slow (12 hours) |
rapid (2 hours) |
rapid (2 hours) |
rapid (2 hours) |
rapid (2 hours) |
rapid (2 hours) |
|||||||
Run Time EXPLAIN |
40 hours | 40 hours | 40 hours | 100+ hours | 75 hours | 100+ hours | 100+ hours | |||||||
Collar Battery EXPLAIN |
6-volt | rechargeable | rechargeable | rechargeable | rechargeable | rechargeable | rechargeable | |||||||
Transmitter Battery EXPLAIN |
6-volt | rechargeable | rechargeable | 9-volt | rechargeable | rechargeable | rechargeable | |||||||
Innotek |
SportDOG |
|
SportDOG |
Tri-tronics |
SportDOG |
Tri-tronics
|
Tri-tronics |
|||||||
I ordered an e-collar. Now what?
Educate yourself. If you don't know how to train your dog using an e-collar, you need to learn. Your e-collar purchase includes a Robin Macfarlane video that will help get you started. We also have a variety of free training videos and articles so you can start learning before your e-collar even arrives! If you want even more educational material, we have a variety of resources available to help. By educating yourself, you're setting your dog up for success.What if I don't like it?
As always, all of our e-collars come with our risk-free 30-day money-back guarantee, so USE YOUR COLLAR! Every day. On your dog. Outside. Train in the water and in the mud. Cut your collar straps down to size. Using your new e-collar WILL NOT affect your ability to return or exchange it during your 30-day trial period. You DO NOT have to send it back "like new" or in resellable condition! Plus, you pay NO RESTOCKING FEES. If for any reason you decide it’s not right for you, we’ll take it back and exchange it or give you a refund. In addition to our Money Back Guarantee, all the collars we sell have at least a 1-Year Warranty from the manufacturer which begins on the invoice date. If you have any questions, call us at 1-800-624-6378!]]>DVD usually ships the next business day.]]>
-->
Do you have an e-collar for your dog but you've been afraid to use it? Stop worrying and start training! This 5-disc set will take you step-by-step through the process, from starting the training and finding a level up and through working around distractions and being ready to go off-leash!
Three dogs of varying personalities were adopted from a shelter environment and trained daily over the course of 3-weeks. This video series captures the real-time footage starting from day one of introducing the e-collar and progresses to the point of off-leash control and working around real world distractions. Robin takes you step-by-step through the process of laying a foundation, solving common problems, working through distractions and graduating to off-leash freedom. The systematic approach and detailed instruction is designed specifically with the novice e-collar user in mind, but even experienced trainers will find a gem or two to add to their training toolbox!
Each of the dogs in this video series, Grace, Brandi and Bonnie, started training within 72 hours of being adopted from a shelter environment. What you will see are real-time training sessions, not special editing or previously trained dogs. Viewers will be watching dogs with different temperaments being worked through challenges toward the goal of off-leash control and a greatly improved relationship with their handler.
This video series takes a systematic approach to e-collar use from introduction to off-leash control. Robin's e-collar instructional materials are clear, concise and never sacrifice the physical or emotional well-being of the dog. With this training, your dog will be calmer, more controlled AND be able to experience the joys of off-leash freedom!
Disc 1: Overview
Disc 1: Before You Start the Training
Disc 2: Getting Started and Building a Foundation
Disc 3: Manners and Problem Solving
Disc 3: What To Teach Next
Disc 4: Proofing the Training
Disc 4: Including Some Fun
Disc 5: Ready to Go Off-Leash
DVD usually ships the next business day.]]>
- Start
- Introduction
- Socialization and Beyond
- General Guidelines
- General Field Protocols
- Beware of Excesses
- My Puppy Program
- 7-10 Weeks Old
- 10-12 Weeks Old
- 12-20 Weeks Old
- 20-24 Weeks Old
- How To: Tasks & Skills
- Operant Conditioning
- How it Works
- "Here"
- "Sit"
- "Down"
- "Kennel"
- "Fetch" Game
- E-collar Conditioning to "Here"
- Opening
- Introduction
- Principles
- Formalizing "Here"
- Session 1 Begins
- E-Collar Begins
- Pressure Conditioning
- Restraint
- Ending the Session
- Follow-Up Sessions
- Pre-Basic Pups
- "Heel" & "Sit"
- Square "Sit"
- "Kennel"
- "Kennel" Progression
- Commands working Together
- De-Bolt
- Work Smart Finale
Chapters:
- Introduction
- Prerequisites
- 3-Handed Casting
- E-Collar Conditioning to "Sit"
- Follow-up Sessions
- Transition to Mini-T
- Follow up to Mini-T
- Forcing on Casts
- Drill Essentials
- Words of Caution
- T Objectives
- Running Single-T
- En route Force
- Identify and Force on Casts
- Beginning the Running of the Single-T
- "Here" as a Cast
- The Power of Double-T
- Running Double-T
- Troubleshooting T's
- Bugging
- No-go
- Popping
- Closing Comments
- Start
- Prerequesites
- Mentorship
- Warm Up & Start Session
- A Snag!
- Rope-a-dope!
- Follow Up & Review
- Pressure Commentary
- Swim-by
- Identifying Piles
- Treading Water
- More Than One Way!
- Put it Together
- Non-acceptance
- How Do I Know When I'm Done?
- Ready to Move on?
- Start
- Introduction
- Opening
- Flow Chart
- "Hold" using Paint Roller
- Walking Hold
- Ear Pinch "Fetch"
- Stick "Fetch"
- E-Collar Condition to "Fetch"
- Walking "Fetch"
- "Fetch - No - Fetch"
- Mini-Pile
- Force to Pile
- Finish forcing Process with Water Force (see WaterForce video)
- Schedules and Marking
- Objectives
- Bonus Material
- Logical Progression
- Obedience
- "Hold"
- Acceptance vs Avoidance
- The Puzzle!
- Our Idea!
- Walking Hold
- "Fetch"
- Fetch Objects
- Tables?
- Ear Pinch
- Turning Off Pressure
- Clamming
- Forcing Progression
- Conducting Sessions / "Hold"
- Transition to Ear Pinch
- Transition Review
- Roller to Bumper
- Going Down
- E-collar Condition to "Fetch"
- Stick Fetch
- Fetch-no-Fetch
- Force to Pile
- From Mini-Pile to 9-Bumpers
- Vital Details
- Pattern Blinds
- Bonus Material Details
- Forcing on Birds
- Finale
Smartwork is a system I developed over 30 years and is presented in a multimedia format to provide the premier learning tool for aspiring trainers. The three books, Smartwork for Retrievers Volume I: Basics and Transition; Smartwork Volume II: Secrets of the Pros; and SmartFetch constitute the full system. However, to allow ease of learning and a fuller understanding of the material, we provide a growing collection of video modules of the system. Each video module offers the most detailed and graphically illustrated explanation of the steps of development for your retriever available anywhere! We include all the sequential steps and tips you'll need to do your own training with your dog and develop him or her to the highest level you desire. In addition, in future video productions we will be presenting even more instruction beyond that which is contained in our books. Handling, marking, practical hunting applications, and competition-based instruction are all proposed for future productions. The cost of each item has been kept at an affordable level to allow you to expand your library of information at your own pace while giving you the information you need to enjoy the pride of having done it yourself! This will continue to be our commitment to you. NOTE: Because it is important to me that my system is presented as it is intended to be used, we shoot all our own video and do all our own editing and video production. No non-dog trainers participate in this process, and that has allowed each presentation to be geared toward the trainer exclusively. No aspect of our information has been watered down, modified, or omitted because of production concerns. Every effort has been made to assure that this program is enjoyable to watch while sparing no effort to provide extensively detailed instruction. --Evan Graham]]>
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
"Because your dog doesn't care what color it is!"]]>
Dogs are den animals and naturally have the instinct to dig a burrow. This is why they circle and scratch before lying down. Bizzy Dog Beds have a unique design that mimics the natural shape of the entrance to a burrow.
DOGS LOVE BIZZY BEDS!
BIZZY BEDS are designed the same way dogs naturally make their nests. The "Natural Dog Den" design caters to your dog's natural burrowing instincts.
Wrinkles enjoys her Large Bizzy Bed
Dog beds are great for inside dogs for two reasons:
1. INSIDE DOGS NEED THEIR OWN SPOT.
- It's important for a dog's security to feel that they have their own place -- a spot they don't have to share with other dogs. Dogs really enjoy spending time in their BIZZY beds. That's important for inside dogs because they are going to spend a LOT of time there.
Their spot needs to be comfortable:
- a PLACE they enjoy
- a PLACE for them to relax
- a PLACE they can go when they want
- a PLACE for when they're inside not interacting with you
2. YOU NEED A PLACE TO PUT YOUR DOG WHEN THEY ARE IN THE WAY.
- YOU need a spot where you can put your dog that's out of the way WHEN HE'S BOTHERING YOU. A PLACE you can send him to his bed where he will STAY until you release him.
So how do you do this?
Our "TEACHING THE PLACE COMMAND" training video comes FREE with every BIZZY BED.
Professional Dog Trainer ROBIN MACFARLANE teaches you how to train your dog to PLACE -- to go to a defined spot and keep all four paws there until you release him and give him permission to leave.
With this one command, you solve the PROBLEM of your dog being underfoot while you are:
Dixie enjoys her X-Large Bizzy Bed
Bizzy Bed Design
Dogs are den animals and naturally have the instinct to dig a burrow. This is why they circle and scratch before lying down. Bizzy Pet Beds have a unique design that mimics the natural shape of the entrance to a burrow.How Bizzy Beds are Made
BIZZY BEDS are made by hand in the United States from furniture quality materials so they are both DURABLE and EASY TO CLEAN. The outside material is heavy-weight furniture fabric. Seams are sewn using a SERGER, which has five threads per needle, so they are INCREDIBLY strong. The interior is filled with shredded foam which means the bed is comfortable for your dog AND will maintain its shape for years and not flatten out.
Steve's setter Cowboy enjoys his Large Bizzy Bed
What Size Do I Need?
It depends on both your available space AND the size of your dog. Make sure that it's big enough for your dog. A slightly larger size gives your dog plenty of room to move around.Bizzy Beds are BIG!
...AND shipping can be expensive, especially the larger sizes. To save you money we vacuum seal your bed into a bag and compress the foam. This makes a much smaller package and saves money on shipping, which means you pay less!When Your Bed Arrives
Bizzy Beds have a Removable Cover
Bizzy Beds are Easy to Clean
We recommend hand washing whenever possible. Be sure to test all soaps and cleaners on a small inconspicuous spot prior to cleaning large areas!- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Remove the cover (on beds with a zipper).
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Wash with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Once the shredded foam dries, you may need to fluff your bed to redistribute the foam.
- Beds with solid interiors may be pressed flat or rolled up to remove excess water before air-drying.
Download Care Instructions for Bizzy Beds
 | Care Instructions for Bizzy Beds |
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
- Use water and mild laundry or dish soap.
- Dab the stain with soapy water using a clean cloth (avoid scrubbing).
- Remove excess soapy water using a clean wet cloth and pat dry.
- Wash cover with laundry detergent, dish soap, or your dog's non-medicated shampoo in the bathtub or with a hose.
- Squeeze out the excess water, then air dry.
LARGE -- 36"L x 26"W x 26"H -- fits Dakota 283 G3 Medium, Dakota 283 Original Kennebec, Dakota 283 Kennebec Airline, Ruff Land Large, and Lucky Duck Intermediate
LARGE EXTENDED -- 37"L x 26"W x 28.5"H -- fits Dakota 283 G3 Large and Gunner Kennels G1 Intermediate
EXTRA LARGE -- 40"L x 28.5"W x 30"H -- fits Dakota 283 XL, Dakota 283 Hero, and Lucky Duck Large
The Mud River Dixie Insulated Kennel Cover has many features that will allow your dog protection from the cold and rain making your standard dog crate a warm, dry, and comfortable place for your hunting dog. It will keep the inside of your crate 20-40 degrees warmer than the outside air temperature (depending on size of dog, working or resting dog, windows on or off, door up or down). Features on the Dixie Dog Crate Cover include MicroLite3 insulation, a 2-ply infused 1200D Poly industrial grade bottom that is built to withstand years of abrasion, water-resistant coating for protection in foul and unpredictable weather, rubber handles on the top making it easy to move and carry, and 4 side D-Rings for securing the kennel in the back of your truck. Rubber mesh over each window and velcro loops on the front allow you to open up the sides and roll up the front flap for proper airflow when the weather warms up. The Mud River Kennel cover also has multiple side, rear, and top pockets and storage areas that help you keep all your dog training gear safe and secure. Comes with a 1-year manufacturer's warranty. WARNINGS:
Innovation and Animal protection is a driving force at Mud River. Our pursuit of superior product performance will only enhance the Human and Animal relationship. Keeping with our quest for your dog's well-being, we have loaded our kennel covers with a wealth of health benefits. The chosen material is a 2 ply infused 1200D that has a Water-Resistant coating for protection in foul and unpredictable weather. Worry not -- when the mercury drops the microlite 3 insulation will supply thermal bliss. You will also find that we have placed a tough and tumble rubber mesh over each window to ensure air is dispensed properly and to secure fit while running 70. While the need for gear is essential you will find stash pockets in all the right locations. The industrial-grade bottom was not an afterthought, built to withstand years of abrasion.]]>
Dogs need access to fresh, clean water no matter the time of year.
Heat is certainly one consideration when choosing an automatic waterer, as your dog's need for water increases in hotter months and warmer climates. Believe it or not, cold weather can also dehydrate your dog -- not just because your house is drier from running the heat, but also because the humidity level in the atmosphere decreases during the winter months. In fact, keeping your dog well hydrated year-round helps to maintain normal body temperature, moves nutrients and oxygen throughout their body, aids digestion, and more. Dehydration is never good for your dog's health, and the easiest way to make sure they have regular access to clean water is with a dog waterer, whether at home or on the go.
What are the pros and cons of automatic waterers?
Automatic waterers are a great way to provide your dog with a constant supply of fresh, clean, and cool water. The majority of what we classify as automatic waterers are designed so you can screw them onto a hose or connect them directly to a water pipe. Buckets and bowls don't offer this convenience. It can be tempting to stop checking your dog's water daily when you install an automatic waterer. If your waterer were to stop functioning properly, your dog could be at risk of dehydration. Therefore, at the very least, these products should be checked daily for proper function. Always remember that your dog is at your mercy when it comes to having water available.How do automatic waterers work?
Conceptually, automatic dog waterers are just little commodes. As the water valve begins to float in the waterer, it slowly halts the flow of water into the reservoir. It is the exact same technology that fills your commode when you flush.
Why do some waterers cost so much more than others?
The difference between a $20 waterer and a $180 waterer is the material they are made of. A $20 one is made of plastic, whereas a $120 one is made out of stainless steel. There are also differences in the quality of the internal components. The nicest metal waterer that we sell is the Nelson 1200. It is made of high-grade stainless steel and is our most popular automatic pet waterer. It can be attached directly to a chain-link fence or to a wall with the hose connected on the left side or the right side, depending on what you need. Although stainless steel can rust, it is not as inclined to rust like other metals and will maintain its shiny finish over time.
If you're on a budget and your dog isn't a chewer, then a plastic waterer may meet your needs. If you've got a chewer, then we don't recommend plastic automatic waterers because your dog will destroy them.
The Tough Guy Waterer is made of polypropylene, connects to your garden hose, and provides consistent fresh water for your dogs. It is fence or wall mountable and easy to clean -- just twist the large drain plug to empty old wastewater. Add a drain hose to direct the used water away from your dog's drinking area. It's rust-proof, durable, cleans quickly, and is sun resistant.
Our least expensive automatic waterer option is the Aqua Buddy which is just the right size for home use. It connects to any standard garden hose and provides consistent fresh water for your dog or cat. It's also made from polypropylene, is easy to clean, and is sun resistant.
What about water buckets or bowls?
We recommend stainless steel water buckets over plastic or rubber. When considering the type of water bucket you need, think about how likely it is to be tipped over. You need to make sure your bucket is secure and large enough to contain enough water to last until you return. Even with the best buckets, it is still good practice to check your dog's water daily, or better yet twice daily if possible. Buckets are good for kennel runs. If you are wanting to set up a stationary waterer, we recommend a stainless steel bucket that holds 4-5 gallons. You should clip the bucket to your fence with a double end brass snap or brass bolt snap with swivel eye to prevent your dogs from knocking the bucket over. In the summer, we recommend putting two buckets in your kennel so your dogs have a backup.
No-tip water bowls are good for indoor use, but may not be the best choice outside. As the water level drops from your dog's drinking, it becomes more likely the bowls might be turned over. Plus, a lot of dogs (Labradors in particular) like to dig in their water bowls. The largest no-tip bowl we carry is about 96 ounces or 3/4 gallon.
How do I keep algae out of my dog's water?
Algae growth is the biggest problem that you have got to watch out for, whether you use bowls, buckets, or an automatic waterer. Although treated city water isn't supposed to have algae, once you set it outside it is exposed to organic material in the air which can lead to algae growth. The best way to fight this is to keep your dog's water in the shade. Since the shade changes over the course of a day, you should carefully consider your kennel location and water location.
Algae requires sunlight, so if you leave your dog's water in direct sunlight long enough, algae will begin to grow. We will occasionally have customers who don't realize what is going on, and the next thing they know, the bottom of their dog's new bucket or waterer is green. Also consider that the water is going to get warmer as the temperature rises, and the algae will grow more rapidly in the warmer water. Keeping it in the shade as much as possible will keep the temperature down, slowing algae growth. Most algae is not that harmful, but if YOU don't want to drink something, your dog probably doesn't either!
We recommend you dump and refill stationary water sources like buckets and bowls at least every other day, depending on the time of year. Water buckets and automatic bowl waterers have to be cleaned out on a semi-regular basis, depending on how much direct sunlight they are exposed to. If you have an algae situation, the fastest way to clean it is with a bleach-based cleaning product called the Wysiwash. Be sure that you follow the product directions exactly before refilling with clean drinking water.
What about Lixit Automatic Dog Waterers?
A Lixit is a different concept than an automatic water bowl in that a Lixit does not fill up. It is very similar to a water fountain and attaches directly to your outside faucet. It has a lever on the end that your dog presses, allowing water to run out. Most dogs that use them love them, and they are also really inexpensive. In a lot of situations, they are better than a bowl because you don't have to worry about algae or the bowl getting knocked over. A bowl-style automatic waterer is self-explanatory to your dog. You put the bowl out there and if your dog is used to drinking out of a bowl, they will use it. Alternatively, a Lixit actually takes a bit of training. The easiest way is to take some peanut butter and put it on the end of the water release lever. Since most dogs love peanut butter, your dog will start to lick it and the water will run out. We have two different models of Lixit. Most people are going to want the Lixit Automatic Dog Waterer for Faucets which is designed to screw directly onto your faucet or spigot. You might customize it by adding a hose to put it in a preferred location, but you are really better off connecting it straight to the faucet so there is no hose for your dog to chew on. We also have the Lixit Dog Waterer for Pipes which attaches to a half-inch water pipe, which most people do not have.
What if it's below freezing outside?
Lixits and non-heated automatic bowl waterers are not intended for below-freezing temperatures. For those cold winter months, you need a heated waterer. To install a heated waterer you need a combination of water and electricity, which is not something that a lot of people are comfortable combining. Make sure that you are putting your dog in a situation where he CANNOT mess with the electricity. If your dog is a heavy chewer or young puppy this line of products may not be for you. The Farm Innovators Heated 3-quart Pet Bowl will keep your dog's water from freezing in sub-zero temperatures and features a stainless steel insert. If you need more water for multiple dogs, check out their 18-quart Heated Rubber Flat-Back Bucket. Neither of these refills automatically. The Nelson "Blue Devil" Water Bucket Heater keeps your dog's water from freezing in sub-zero temperatures and can be used in metal, plastic, or rubber buckets that hold up to 5 gallons of water. It features copper tubing that protects the power cord from chewing, a stainless steel mounting bracket, and a safety chain that snaps to the fence to prevent the heater cord from being pulled into your dog run. What will work best for you? It depends on your situation, your dog, and your kennel set-up.
How should I handle watering on the road?
Generally when traveling with dogs, the only time you will need to water them is when you walk them. Stop every three or four hours to exercise them, and at that point offer them water. We recommend several portable bowls as an option, or you could carry two quart stainless steel bowls. The biggest downside to just filling up water bowls whenever you let your dogs out is that you end up dumping out whatever they don't drink. When you are carrying eight or fifteen dogs with you, wasted water is not a good idea. An alternative is to use a Portable Standalone Waterer such as the Drinking Spot or Ruff Land Waterer. These waterers hold more water than standard bowls which makes them great for watering multiple dogs, so it really comes down to how many dogs you have to water at one time when deciding which will work best for you.
The Drinking Spot holds 2.5 gallons of water. Just flip it down and the bowl section fills with water, automatically refilling as your dogs drink. It will continue to refill until the reservoir is empty. When your dogs are done, flip it back up and all the unused water will drain back into the storage reservoir. The Dakota 283 Waterer, which holds up to 5 gallons of water, works in a similar manner.
What if my dog stays at home indoors while I go to work?
Most of the products we carry are designed for outdoor use, but some could be utilized inside as well.]]>Why are retriever dummies sometimes called "bumpers?"
Dog Bumpers originally came from boat bumpers -- the rubber or plastic floats that keep a boat from bumping into the dock. Retrievers are water dogs, so it makes sense that they'd be around boats. Most likely, someone threw a small bumper for a retriever to fetch, and realized what a great retriever training tool they were. Dog bumpers float, the white bumpers are easy to see, and with a rope and a little water in them for weight, you can throw retrieving dummies a pretty long way.
Why are there different colors?
Different colors are for different levels of retriever training. Some dummy colors are easier for dogs to see than others. Dogs see contrasts, they don't see in "color." Retrievers can see some shades of color, but they don't see color the way humans see color. An orange dummy can look gray to a dog. It depends on what background the orange dummy up against, but for the majority of backgrounds the orange disappears. The orange is for you, the human dog handler, to more easily see it. Orange retrieving dummies don't have the contrast that a white retrieving dummy has against a dark background or a black training dummy has against a light background. The white/black dummies are really popular because you get the best of both worlds. If you drop one against a dark background you have the light contrast, and on a light background you have the dark contrast. Plus, if you throw it in the air against a light sky the black will show up, and when it hits the ground the white will show up. On water the black part of the dummy will disappear, but the white will show up.
Why are most plastic dummies knobby?
Retrieving dummies have knobs because it makes it easier for retrievers to pick them up, like treads or grips. You don't want a training dummy slipping around in a dog's mouth.
What does the water valve do?
The rubber valves on many plastic dummies allow you to add water to weight the dummy. Water makes the dummies heavier so you can throw them farther. Note that most dog dummies or bumpers with water valves will sink if you put too much water in them, but if you put the right amount in them they will float a little lower in the water, making them harder to see -- perfect for advanced retriever training. When you add water using the water valve, it's a good idea to test your dummies BEFORE you throw them in the lake!
Why are there different sizes and materials?
Plastic dummies are easier to maintain, but it's mostly a matter of personal preference whether you choose plastic or canvas. It's a good idea to mix sizes and types of retriever dummies so your dog doesn't get used to picking up just one dummy, and possibly not pick up anything else! It's also important to use birds in training whenever possible for the same reason. For a more realistic retrieving dummy, take a look at the Dokken DeadFowl Trainer. The advantages of Dokken DeadFowl Trainers are they are life size, mimic a real bird in firmness, and the head and feet are hard which encourages your dog to carry them properly. Also, the hard flopping head discourages the dog from shaking the dummy.
Do I need a firm or soft dummy?
There are conflicting opinions on softness and firmness regarding what's best to avoid, or which will better solve mouth problems with dogs. Some say a firm dummy discourages chewing, and others say a soft dummy that offers less resistance accomplishes the same thing. "Hard Mouth," or a dog being too aggressive with a dummy or bird, can be a genetic trait, a man made problem, or combination of both. The best way to avoid mouth problems is not to snatch from your dog (creating possessiveness), and to practice short controlled retrieves so your dog doesn't have a chance to be too rough. Many dogs are force fetched or force retrieved which teaches them to hold an object properly.
Why use scent while training?
Scent is used to teach a dog to hunt for a dead or wounded bird using it's sense of smell if you don't have a bird for practice. Scent can be liberally applied to a plastic or canvas dummy, or it can be injected into a foam dummy. Generally you want to throw the dummy in some tall grass so they have to use their nose to find it. After a dog understands to "hunt dead" by practicing these drills, a more advanced drill is to take a dog to an area where the scented dummy has been placed (the dog does not see it thrown) and have them find it.What brands do you sell?
Our most popular training dummies are regular-sized SportDOG Lucky Dog dummies. These dummies are consistently well-made and very competitively priced. Some of the other brands of bumpers and retriever training throw dummies we carry include Avery, Dokken, RRT, DT Systems, PAC, and Real Duck. See all our retriever training dummies and bumpers here.]]>11" dia. opening, 8 3/4" dia. base, 10" height
7 3/4" dia. opening, 6 3/8" dia. base, 7" height
8 3/4" dia. opening, 7" dia. base, 8 1/4" height
10" dia. opening, 7 3/4" dia. base, 9 1/4" height
7 3/4" dia. opening, 6 3/8" dia. base, 7" height
8 3/4" dia. opening, 7" dia. base, 8 1/4" height
9" dia. opening, 7 3/4" dia. base, 9 3/4" height
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Socializing
- Puppy Marks
- Formal Obedience
- Teaching Hold
- Force Breaking
- Adanced Force breaking
- Collar Conditioning
- Steady Drill
- Quartering Drill
- Fowl Dawgs 2 Preview
- Fowl Pursuit 4 Preview
- Force to Pile
- Indirect Pressure
- Whistle Sit
- Mini T
- Double T
- Swim By
- Remote Swim By
- Pattern Blinds
- Blind Drills
- Diversions
- Marked Blinds
- Cheating Singles
- Cheating Singles as Blinds
- Advanced Cheater Marks
- Remote Blind Drills
- Cold Water Blinds
- Wagon Wheel
- Tune Up Drill
- 3 Legged Blinds
- Walk Around Blinds
- In Line Marking Drill
- Making Drills
- Y Drill Land
- Y Drill Water
- Check Down Drill
- Punch Bird Drill
- Crazy Quad
- Handling Drills
- Cast Into Water Drill
- Cast Off Point Drill
- Keyhole Drills
- Problem Solving
- Loopy Sit Fix
- Bird Boy Blinds
- 180 Degree Triple Drill
- Socializing
- Puppy Marks
- Formal Obediance
- Teaching Hold
- Force Breaking
- Adanced Force breaking
- Collar Conditioning
- Steady Drill
- Quartering Drill
- Fowl Dawgs 2 Preview
- Fowl Pursuit 4 Preview
- Force to Pile
- Indirect Pressure
- Whistle Sit
- Mini T
- Double T
- Swim By
- Remote Swim By
- Pattern Blinds
- Blind Drills
- Diversions
- Marked Blinds
- Cheating Singles
- Cheating Singles as Blinds
- Advanced Cheater Marks
- Remote Blind Drills
- Cold Water Blinds
- Wagon Wheel
- Tune Up Drill
- 3 Legged Blinds
- Walk Around Blinds
- In Line Marking Drill
- Making Drills
- Y Drill Land
- Y Drill Water
- Check Down Drill
- Punch Bird Drill
- Crazy Quad
- Handling Drills
- Cast Into Water Drill
- Cast Off Point Drill
- Keyhole Drills
- Problem Solving
- Loopy Sit Fix
- Bird Boy Blinds
- 180 Degree Triple Drill
DVD usually ships the next business day.]]>
Smartwork is a system I developed over 30 years and is presented in a multimedia format to provide the premier learning tool for aspiring trainers. The three books, Smartwork for Retrievers Volume I: Basics and Transition; Smartwork Volume II: Secrets of the Pros; and SmartFetch constitute the full system. However, to allow ease of learning and a fuller understanding of the material, we provide a growing collection of video modules of the system. Each video module offers the most detailed and graphically illustrated explanation of the steps of development for your retriever available anywhere! We include all the sequential steps and tips you'll need to do your own training with your dog and develop him or her to the highest level you desire. In addition, in future video productions we will be presenting even more instruction beyond that which is contained in our books. Handling, marking, practical hunting applications, and competition-based instruction are all proposed for future productions. The cost of each item has been kept at an affordable level to allow you to expand your library of information at your own pace while giving you the information you need to enjoy the pride of having done it yourself! This will continue to be our commitment to you. NOTE: Because it is important to me that my system is presented as it is intended to be used, we shoot all our own video and do all our own editing and video production. No non-dog trainers participate in this process, and that has allowed each presentation to be geared toward the trainer exclusively. No aspect of our information has been watered down, modified, or omitted because of production concerns. Every effort has been made to assure that this program is enjoyable to watch while sparing no effort to provide extensively detailed instruction. --Evan Graham]]>
- Single beep
- Double beep
- Triple beep
- Low beep
- Hawk sound
Fits the Following Garmin GPS Units: Alpha 300i
Alpha 300
Alpha 200i
Alpha 200
Alpha 100
Astro 430
Astro 320
DriveTrack 71
DriveTrack 70
Rino 610, 650, and 655t
Oregon series
Dakota series
GPSMAP 62 series
eTrex 10, 20, and 30]]>
Dynamic Tracking -- auto-adjusts update rate based on dog activity, extending collar battery life to approx. 68 hours
Multi-Colored LED Running Lights -- identify your dogs in the dark with 7 different colors to choose from
Field-Replaceable Flex Band -- if the connector between the collar and GPS antenna gets damaged you can now replace it yourself
Multi-Colored Collar Status Indicator -- know at a glance the status of your TT25 collars
One Size Fits Most -- slightly larger than the TT15 MINI, the TT25 can be comfortably worn by small and large dogs alike
Automatic Collar Software Updates -- collars auto-update to the latest software when charging and connected to WiFi
- Preset alert messages include:
- Help
- Are you OK?
- I'm coming
- Stay there
- OK
- Yes
- No
- Come here
- Lost dog
- Injured dog
- Ending hunt
- Go on without me
- Headed your way
- Caution: others nearby
- Game spotted
- Slow down
- Speed up
- Nice shot
TT25, TT15X, TT15, and TT10 Compatible Tracking Only Collars:
T20, T5X, and T5 Alpha 10 Handheld Comes with:
- Alpha 10 compact tracking/training handheld
- Spine mount
- Carabiner clip
- Carabiner loop
- Extra screw with wrench kit
- Belt clip
- Micro USB cable
- Owner's manual
- Dimensions: 2.3" x 4.8" x 1.1" with antenna
- Weight: 5.6 oz.
Output: 5V 2.0A max.
Want to also charge your collars? Make sure you have the right charging clip! (available separately) For TT15 / T5 Users: Requires the Garmin TT15 / T5 Charging Clip. For TT15 MINI / T5 MINI / PRO Series Users: Requires the Garmin TT15 MINI / T5 MINI / PRO Series Charging Clip. For TT10 Users: Requires the Garmin TT10 Charging Clip. For Delta XC Series Users: Requires the Garmin Delta XC Series Charging Clip. For Bark Limiter Deluxe Users: Requires the Bark Limiter Deluxe Charging Clip. Charge both your transmitter and collar at the same time by adding a USB Splitter Cable.]]>
Includes everything you need:
- NOTE: Make sure the edges of the protector line up with the screen edges of the device
- Preset alert messages include:
- Help
- Are you OK?
- I'm coming
- Stay there
- OK
- Yes
- No
- Come here
- Lost dog
- Injured dog
- Ending hunt
- Go on without me
- Headed your way
- Caution: others nearby
- Game spotted
- Slow down
- Speed up
- Nice shot
- Dimensions: 2.7" x 6.4" x 1.3" with antenna
- Weight: 9.9 oz. ]]>
- Quick-charge batteries with a long run time mean more hunting, more training, and less charging
- Track your friends' Alpha handhelds in the field
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver for increased signal reception
- Rescue Mode preserves battery life so you can find lost dogs
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
Know Where Your Dog Is, Where He's Heading, and What He's Doing:
- Track up to 20 dogs or other Alpha handhelds
- The Compass Screen shows your dogs' direction, distance, and speed
- The Map Screen lets you see your dogs' trails on the TOPO map
- See if your dog is approaching a highway or property line
- See if your dog is out of gun range
- See if your dog is running too big BEFORE he gets too far out
- Up to 2.5-second dog status update rate
- Know when your dog is on point or has treed with Pointing and Treeing Alerts
- Preloaded TopoActive map features not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Includes downloadable satellite imagery with no annual subscription required
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service for additional map options
Training with the Alpha 200 PLUS:
You will have to add a Garmin TT25 collar to use the training functions on the Alpha 200 PLUS.- Customizable buttons plus touchscreen controls for maximum versatility
- Create your own configuration with specific stimulation types and settings for each dog
- Access your custom settings immediately -- easier and faster than setting manual controls
- Use to train the most stubborn to the most sensitive dogs
- Reinforce known commands and stop problem behaviors / break trash
- 18 levels of continuous and momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone functions
- Expandable to 20 dogs with additional collars Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
- Track and train your dog with just one handheld on just one screen
- One less system to keep charged and carry around
- One less collar to weigh your dog down
- Quick-charge batteries with a long run time mean more hunting, more training, and less charging
- Track your friends' Alpha handhelds in the field
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver for increased signal reception
- Rescue Mode preserves battery life so you can find lost dogs
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
Know Where Your Dog Is, Where He's Heading, and What He's Doing:
- Track up to 20 dogs or other Alpha handhelds
- The Compass Screen shows your dogs' direction, distance, and speed
- The Map Screen lets you see your dogs' trails on the TOPO map
- See if your dog is approaching a highway or property line
- See if your dog is out of gun range
- See if your dog is running too big BEFORE he gets too far out
- Up to 2.5-second dog status update rate
- Know when your dog is on point or has treed with Pointing and Treeing Alerts
- Preloaded TopoActive map features not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Includes downloadable satellite imagery with no annual subscription required
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service for additional map options
Training with the Alpha 200 PLUS:
- Customizable buttons plus touchscreen controls for maximum versatility
- Create your own configuration with specific stimulation types and settings for each dog
- Access your custom settings immediately -- easier and faster than setting manual controls
- Use to train the most stubborn to the most sensitive dogs
- Reinforce known commands and stop problem behaviors / break trash
- 18 levels of continuous and momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone functions
- Expandable to 20 dogs with additional collars Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
Garmin Alpha® 200 Plus Handheld
The Alpha 200 Plus is essentially the same system as the Alpha 300 — with one key difference: the screen.
What the Alpha 200 Plus Is
- Same hardware as the Alpha 300
- Same operating software
- USB-C charging port
- 55–60 hour handheld battery life
- Same tracking and training performance
- No inReach (satellite communication) version available
If you want inReach capability, you’ll need to step up to an Alpha 300i. The 200 Plus is offered as a handheld only.
The Only Real Difference: The Screen
The Alpha 200 Plus uses the earlier Alpha 200-series display.
- Slightly older screen technology
- Not quite as bright or sharp as the Alpha 300 screen
- Performance and functionality remain the same
When the Alpha 200 Plus Makes Sense
The 200 Plus is a strong choice if you:
- Track primarily in Compass View
- Use standard topo maps
- Run HuntView cards
- Don’t rely on detailed satellite imagery
- Want Alpha 300 performance at a lower price
For most hunters tracking dogs in the field, the difference in screens is small.
When You Should Choose an Alpha 300 Instead
Consider the Alpha 300 if:
- You frequently use satellite imagery
- Detailed mapping matters to you
- You run maps heavily at night
- You want the newest display available
The newer screen shows higher-detail maps noticeably better.
Simple Comparison
| Feature | Alpha 200 Plus | Alpha 300 |
|---|---|---|
| Tracking & Training | Same | Same |
| Software | Same | Same |
| Battery Life | 55–60 hrs | 55–60 hrs |
| Charging Port | USB-C | USB-C |
| inReach Option | No | Yes (300i) |
| Screen | Older display | Newer high-resolution display |
Bottom Line
If you don’t depend on satellite maps, the Alpha 200 Plus gives you nearly everything the Alpha 300 offers — at a lower cost.
You’re getting the same performance, battery life, and software. The trade-off is simply the screen.
- 3X the battery life of the original Alpha 200 handheld -- 50+ hours runtime
- USB-C port for charging and data transfer via PC or Mac
- Sleek, streamlined design
- Fully rubberized outer coating with an over-molding
- Touchscreen works even when wearing gloves
- Meets tough IPX7 waterproof standards
- Quad helix GPS / Galileo antenna for improved signal reception
- Removable VHF antenna
- Barometric altimeter
- 3-axis compass
- 16 GB internal memory
- WiFi connectivity allows for software auto-updates, easy Birdseye installation, and more
- Micro SD card slot (max. 32 GB class 10 or less) for preprogrammed MapSource mapping detail such as US TOPO, Inland Lakes, BlueChart, and City Navigator, or add more memory by installing a blank MicroSD Card
- Garmin "backbone" accessory mount plus lanyard attachment point
- Power Button Control Screen includes button lock feature
- Backward compatible so it will work with your existing collars and other Alpha-compatible devices
- Transfer location data between compatible Garmin devices
- Dimensions: 2.7" x 6.4" x 1.3" with antenna
- Weight: 9.9 oz.
- TT25 / TT15X / TT15 / TT15 MINI / TT10
- T20 / T5X / T5 / T5 MINI (tracking function only)
- NOT compatible with Astro DC series collars
- Updated, easier-to-use menu interface
- Channel View lets you see what collar channels are currently available in your area to minimize interference with other users
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service
- Preloaded TopoActive maps
- Directly download BirdsEye satellite imagery to your handheld
- Map Screen Options let you show or hide Dog Status, Distance, Names, and Offscreen Dogs
- Zoom to Map Dogs: automatically see all dogs on your map screen no matter how far they are from you
- Dog Trails: choose from Complete History, Partial History, or No Trail History
- Dog Set Up Menu with universal dog settings including Update Rates and Dog Types
- Dog Alerts: choose tone-only, vibration-only, or tone and vibration
- Hunt Metrics: shows each dog's hunting patterns and behaviors so you can keep them healthy and safe
- Share your dog info with other Alpha handheld units
- Save up to 1,000 waypoints, 50 routes, and 10,000 track points
- Compatible with the Garmin Explore app and website for managing tracks, routes, and waypoints, as well as reviewing statistics from the field
- GeoFence and Radius alerts
- Area calculation feature
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
- Preset alert messages include:
- Help
- Are you OK?
- I'm coming
- Stay there
- OK
- Yes
- No
- Come here
- Lost dog
- Injured dog
- Ending hunt
- Go on without me
- Headed your way
- Caution: others nearby
- Game spotted
- Slow down
- Speed up
- Nice shot
- Customizable settings let you create your own personal configuration with ideal stimulation types and settings for each dog
- 3 front + 3 side buttons and touchscreen controls
- Train and track up to 20 dogs from one screen
- Adjust stimulation levels from any screen
- 18 levels of continuous STIM
- 18 levels of momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone options
- Choose from two stimulation configurations:
- Traditional STIM -- 6 levels with each level having a low, medium, and high for a total of 18 levels, replicating the "classic" Tri-Tronics stimulation setup
- Linear STIM -- 18 levels that exactly match the low, medium, and high levels used in Garmin / Tri-tronics PRO series collars for those who prefer a slightly faster way to raise and lower levels
- 5" handheld antenna
- RF antenna cap
- USB-C cable
- AC adapter
- Rechargeable li-ion battery pack
- Belt clip
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
- Quick-charge batteries with a long run time mean more hunting, more training, and less charging
- Track your friends' Alpha handhelds in the field
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver for increased signal reception
- Rescue Mode preserves battery life so you can find lost dogs
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
Know Where Your Dog Is, Where He's Heading, and What He's Doing:
- Track up to 20 dogs or other Alpha handhelds
- The Compass Screen shows your dogs' direction, distance, and speed
- The Map Screen lets you see your dogs' trails on the TOPO map
- See if your dog is approaching a highway or property line
- See if your dog is out of gun range
- See if your dog is running too big BEFORE he gets too far out
- Up to 2.5-second dog status update rate
- Know when your dog is on point or has treed with Pointing and Treeing Alerts
- Preloaded TopoActive map features not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Includes downloadable satellite imagery with no annual subscription required
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service for additional map options
Training with the Alpha 300:
You will have to add a Garmin TT25 collar to use the training functions on the Alpha 300.- Customizable buttons plus touchscreen controls for maximum versatility
- Create your own configuration with specific stimulation types and settings for each dog
- Access your custom settings immediately -- easier and faster than setting manual controls
- Use to train the most stubborn to the most sensitive dogs
- Reinforce known commands and stop problem behaviors / break trash
- 18 levels of continuous and momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone functions
- Expandable to 20 dogs with additional collars Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
- Track and train your dog with just one handheld on just one screen
- One less system to keep charged and carry around
- One less collar to weigh your dog down
- Quick-charge batteries with a long run time mean more hunting, more training, and less charging
- Track your friends' Alpha handhelds in the field
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver for increased signal reception
- Rescue Mode preserves battery life so you can find lost dogs
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
Know Where Your Dog Is, Where He's Heading, and What He's Doing:
- Track up to 20 dogs or other Alpha handhelds
- The Compass Screen shows your dogs' direction, distance, and speed
- The Map Screen lets you see your dogs' trails on the TOPO map
- See if your dog is approaching a highway or property line
- See if your dog is out of gun range
- See if your dog is running too big BEFORE he gets too far out
- Up to 2.5-second dog status update rate
- Know when your dog is on point or has treed with Pointing and Treeing Alerts
- Preloaded TopoActive map features not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Includes downloadable satellite imagery with no annual subscription required
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service for additional map options
Training with the Alpha 300:
- Customizable buttons plus touchscreen controls for maximum versatility
- Create your own configuration with specific stimulation types and settings for each dog
- Access your custom settings immediately -- easier and faster than setting manual controls
- Use to train the most stubborn to the most sensitive dogs
- Reinforce known commands and stop problem behaviors / break trash
- 18 levels of continuous and momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone functions
- Expandable to 20 dogs with additional collars Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
- Improved 3.5" (diagonal) sunlight-readable touchscreen shows more map detail with brighter colors
- 3X the battery life of the Alpha 200 handheld -- 50+ hours runtime
- USB-C port for charging and data transfer via PC or Mac
- Sleek, streamlined design
- Fully rubberized outer coating with an over-molding
- Touchscreen works even when wearing gloves
- Meets tough IPX7 waterproof standards
- Quad helix GPS / Galileo antenna for improved signal reception
- Removable VHF antenna
- Barometric altimeter
- 3-axis compass
- 16 GB internal memory
- WiFi connectivity allows for software auto-updates, easy Birdseye installation, and more
- Micro SD card slot (max. 32 GB class 10 or less) for preprogrammed MapSource mapping detail such as US TOPO, Inland Lakes, BlueChart, and City Navigator, or add more memory by installing a blank MicroSD Card
- Garmin "backbone" accessory mount plus lanyard attachment point
- Power Button Control Screen includes button lock feature
- See ambient temperature data by adding the Garmin Tempe
- Backward compatible so it will work with your existing collars and other Alpha compatible devices
- Transfer location data between compatible Garmin devices
- Dimensions: 2.7" x 6.4" x 1.3" with antenna
- Weight: 9.9 oz.
- TT25 / TT15X / TT15 / TT15 MINI / TT10
- T20 / T5X / T5 / T5 MINI (tracking function only)
- NOT compatible with Astro DC series collars
- Updated, easier-to-use menu interface
- Channel View lets you see what collar channels are currently available in your area to minimize interference with other users
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service
- Preloaded TopoActive maps
- Directly download BirdsEye satellite imagery to your handheld
- Map Screen Options let you show or hide Dog Status, Distance, Names, and Offscreen Dogs
- Zoom to Map Dogs: automatically see all dogs on your map screen no matter how far they are from you
- Dog Trails: choose from Complete History, Partial History, or No Trail History
- Dog Set Up Menu with universal dog settings including Update Rates and Dog Types
- Dog Alerts: choose tone-only, vibration-only, or tone and vibration
- Hunt Metrics: shows each dog's hunting patterns and behaviors so you can keep them healthy and safe
- Share your dog info with other Alpha handheld units
- Save up to 1,000 waypoints, 50 routes, and 10,000 track points
- Compatible with the Garmin Explore app and website for managing tracks, routes, and waypoints, as well as reviewing statistics from the field
- GeoFence and Radius alerts
- Area calculation feature
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
- Preset alert messages include:
- Help
- Are you OK?
- I'm coming
- Stay there
- OK
- Yes
- No
- Come here
- Lost dog
- Injured dog
- Ending hunt
- Go on without me
- Headed your way
- Caution: others nearby
- Game spotted
- Slow down
- Speed up
- Nice shot
- Customizable settings let you create your own personal configuration with ideal stimulation types and settings for each dog
- 3 front + 3 side buttons and touchscreen controls
- Train and track up to 20 dogs from one screen
- Adjust stimulation levels from any screen
- 18 levels of continuous STIM
- 18 levels of momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone options
- Choose from two stimulation configurations:
- Traditional STIM -- 6 levels with each level having a low, medium, and high for a total of 18 levels, replicating the "classic" Tri-Tronics stimulation setup
- Linear STIM -- 18 levels that exactly match the low, medium, and high levels used in Garmin / Tri-tronics PRO series collars for those who prefer a slightly faster way to raise and lower levels
- 5" handheld antenna
- RF antenna cap
- USB-C cable
- AC adapter
- Rechargeable li-ion battery pack
- Belt clip
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
- Quick-charge batteries with a long run time mean more hunting, more training, and less charging
- Track your friends' Alpha handhelds in the field
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver for increased signal reception
- Rescue Mode preserves battery life so you can find lost dogs
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
- Send interactive SOS alerts and two-way emergency messages via satellite anywhere in the world with built-in InReach technology (subscription required for InReach functions, not required for tracking or training your dogs)
Know Where Your Dog Is, Where He's Heading, and What He's Doing:
- Track up to 20 dogs or other Alpha handhelds
- The Compass Screen shows your dogs' direction, distance, and speed
- The Map Screen lets you see your dogs' trails on the TOPO map
- See if your dog is approaching a highway or property line
- See if your dog is out of gun range
- See if your dog is running too big BEFORE he gets too far out
- Up to 2.5-second dog status update rate
- Know when your dog is on point or has treed with Pointing and Treeing Alerts
- Preloaded TopoActive map features not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Includes downloadable satellite imagery with no annual subscription required
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service for additional map options
Training with the Alpha 300i:
You will have to add a Garmin TT25 collar to use the training functions on the Alpha 300i.- Customizable buttons plus touchscreen controls for maximum versatility
- Create your own configuration with specific stimulation types and settings for each dog
- Access your custom settings immediately -- easier and faster than setting manual controls
- Use to train the most stubborn to the most sensitive dogs
- Reinforce known commands and stop problem behaviors / break trash
- 18 levels of continuous and momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone functions
- Expandable to 20 dogs with additional collars Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
- Track and train your dog with just one handheld on just one screen
- One less system to keep charged and carry around
- One less collar to weigh your dog down
- Quick-charge batteries with a long run time mean more hunting, more training, and less charging
- Track your friends' Alpha handhelds in the field
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver for increased signal reception
- Rescue Mode preserves battery life so you can find lost dogs
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
- Send interactive SOS alerts and two-way emergency messages via satellite anywhere in the world with built-in InReach technology (subscription required for InReach functions, not required for tracking or training your dogs)
Know Where Your Dog Is, Where He's Heading, and What He's Doing:
- Track up to 20 dogs or other Alpha handhelds
- The Compass Screen shows your dogs' direction, distance, and speed
- The Map Screen lets you see your dogs' trails on the TOPO map
- See if your dog is approaching a highway or property line
- See if your dog is out of gun range
- See if your dog is running too big BEFORE he gets too far out
- Up to 2.5-second dog status update rate
- Know when your dog is on point or has treed with Pointing and Treeing Alerts
- Preloaded TopoActive map features not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Includes downloadable satellite imagery with no annual subscription required
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service for additional map options
Training with the Alpha 300i:
- Customizable buttons plus touchscreen controls for maximum versatility
- Create your own configuration with specific stimulation types and settings for each dog
- Access your custom settings immediately -- easier and faster than setting manual controls
- Use to train the most stubborn to the most sensitive dogs
- Reinforce known commands and stop problem behaviors / break trash
- 18 levels of continuous and momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone functions
- Expandable to 20 dogs with additional collars Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
- Improved 3.5" (diagonal) sunlight-readable touchscreen shows more map detail with brighter colors
- 3X the battery life of the Alpha 200 handheld -- 50+ hours runtime
- USB-C port for charging and data transfer via PC or Mac
- InReach technology offers interactive SOS alerts and two-way messaging via the global Iridium satellite network (subscription required; jurisdiction restrictions may apply)
- Dedicated emergency SOS button
- Sleek, streamlined design
- Fully rubberized outer coating with an over-molding
- Touchscreen works even when wearing gloves
- Meets tough IPX7 waterproof standards
- Quad helix GPS / Galileo antenna for improved signal reception
- Removable VHF antenna
- Barometric altimeter
- 3-axis compass
- 16 GB internal memory
- WiFi connectivity allows for software auto-updates, easy Birdseye installation, and more
- Micro SD card slot (max. 32 GB class 10 or less) for preprogrammed MapSource mapping detail such as US TOPO, Inland Lakes, BlueChart, and City Navigator, or add more memory by installing a blank MicroSD Card
- Garmin "backbone" accessory mount plus lanyard attachment point
- Power Button Control Screen includes button lock feature
- See ambient temperature data by adding the Garmin Tempe (available separately)
- Backward compatible so it will work with your existing collars and other Alpha compatible devices
- Transfer location data between compatible Garmin devices
- Dimensions: 2.7" x 6.4" x 1.3" with antenna
- Weight: 9.9 oz.
- TT25 / TT15X / TT15 / TT15 MINI / TT10
- T20 / T5X / T5 / T5 MINI (tracking function only)
- NOT compatible with Astro DC series collars
- Updated, easier-to-use menu interface
- Channel View lets you see what collar channels are currently available in your area to minimize interference with other users
- Compatible with Garmin's Outdoor Maps+ subscription service
- Preloaded TopoActive maps
- Directly download BirdsEye satellite imagery to your handheld
- Map Screen Options let you show or hide Dog Status, Distance, Names, and Offscreen Dogs
- Zoom to Map Dogs: automatically see all dogs on your map screen no matter how far they are from you
- Dog Trails: choose from Complete History, Partial History, or No Trail History
- Dog Set Up Menu with universal dog settings including Update Rates and Dog Types
- Dog Alerts: choose tone-only, vibration-only, or tone and vibration
- Hunt Metrics: shows each dog's hunting patterns and behaviors so you can keep them healthy and safe
- Share your dog info with other Alpha handheld units
- Save up to 1,000 waypoints, 50 routes, and 10,000 track points
- Compatible with the Garmin Explore app and website for managing tracks, routes, and waypoints, as well as reviewing statistics from the field
- GeoFence and Radius alerts
- Area calculation feature
- Emergency Alert lets you send your dog's last known location and an alert message to other Alpha users in the area
- Preset alert messages include:
- Help
- Are you OK?
- I'm coming
- Stay there
- OK
- Yes
- No
- Come here
- Lost dog
- Injured dog
- Ending hunt
- Go on without me
- Headed your way
- Caution: others nearby
- Game spotted
- Slow down
- Speed up
- Nice shot
- Customizable settings let you create your own personal configuration with ideal stimulation types and settings for each dog
- 3 front + 3 side buttons and touchscreen controls
- Train and track up to 20 dogs from one screen
- Adjust stimulation levels from any screen
- 18 levels of continuous STIM
- 18 levels of momentary STIM
- Non-stimulating vibration and tone options
- Choose from two stimulation configurations:
- Traditional STIM -- 6 levels with each level having a low, medium, and high for a total of 18 levels, replicating the "classic" Tri-Tronics stimulation setup
- Linear STIM -- 18 levels that exactly match the low, medium, and high levels used in Garmin / Tri-tronics PRO series collars for those who prefer a slightly faster way to raise and lower levels
- 5" handheld antenna
- RF antenna cap
- USB-C cable
- AC adapter
- Rechargeable li-ion battery pack
- Belt clip
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
Select and activate your subscription plan via the Garmin Messenger™ App
| SOS | Included | Included | Included | Included |
| Check-in messages | $0.10 each | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited |
| Text messages / Weather request | $0.50 each | 50 total | 150 total | Unlimited |
| Photo and voice messages | $1.00 each | 10 total | 25 total | 50 total |
| Tracking intervals | $0.10 each (10 min+) | $0.10 each (10 min+) | Unlimited (10 min+) | Unlimited (2 min+) |
| Activation fee | $39.99 | $39.99 | $39.99 | $39.99 |
| Messages | $0.50 each | $0.50 each | $0.50 each | N/A |
| Photo and voice messages | $1.00 each | $1.00 each | $1.00 each | $1.00 each |
Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.]]>
Alpha 300 / 200 Series Handheld Master Reset
There are a few instances in which you may want to perform a master reset on the Alpha 300 or 200, including the following:- Not receiving a satellite signal
- Restoring the factory default settings
- Not functioning properly
3. Power on the Alpha while continuing to hold both buttons
4. Release ONLY the Power button when "Garmin" appears on the screen
5. Release the other two buttons when the message, "This will remove all saved user data.....?" appears
6. Touch erase
7. Leave your Alpha outside with a clear view of the sky for a minimum of 20 minutes to acquire satellite data Your Alpha is now reset and ready for use.
Alpha 100 Handheld Master Reset
There are a few instances in which you may want to perform a master reset on the Alpha 100, including the following:- Restoring the factory default settings
- Not functioning properly
3. Power on the Alpha while continuing to press the screen
5. Release your finger from the upper left side of the display
6. Touch erase
7. Leave your Alpha outside with a clear view of the sky for a minimum of 20 minutes to acquire satellite data Your Alpha is now reset and ready for use.
Alpha 10 Handheld Master Reset
There are a few instances in which you may want to perform a master reset on the Alpha 10, including the following:- Restoring the factory default settings
- Not functioning properly
- To reset all settings to the default values and save all user-entered information, select Restore Defaults
- To delete all user data and reset all settings to the factory default values, select Factory Reset
Astro 430 / 320 / 220 Handheld Master Reset
There are a few instances in which you may want to perform a master reset on your Astro dog tracking handheld, including the following:- Not receiving a satellite signal
- Restoring the factory default settings
- Not functioning properly
3. Power on the Astro
4. Release the power button
6. Release the Map and Enter buttons and select "yes"
7. Leave your Astro outside with a clear view of the sky for a minimum of 20 minutes to acquire satellite data Your Astro is now reset and ready for use.
Master Reset for T20 and TT25 Dog Collars
If your T20 or TT25 collar is failing to operate as expected, corrupt data may be the cause. Performing a master reset will reset the collar to factory settings and clear data, resolving issues caused by corrupt data. On your Alpha or Astro dog tracking handheld: Remove the collar from the dog list. (Does not apply to Pro 550 Plus) To perform a master reset:
2. Disassemble and remove any Y-splitter cable (the part that allows you to charge two devices at once).
3. Connect the charging clip to the collar.
5. Connect the USB cable to a power source (either a computer or an AC wall adapter).
6. Ensure collar light is active to confirm connection (solid red or green).
10. Re-add the dog collar to your handheld.
The collar has now been reset and is ready for use. If the collar did not reset, you may want to try the sequence again. It may be necessary to leave the device outside with a clear view of the sky for 20 minutes to acquire satellites.
Master Reset for T5 MINI and TT15 MINI Dog Tracking Collars
If your T5 MINI or TT15 MINI collar is failing to operate as expected, corrupt data may be the cause. Performing a master reset will reset the collar to factory settings and clear data, resolving issues caused by corrupt data. To perform a master reset:
2. Rapidly press the power Button 8 times
3. Wait for light to turn solid red then begin flashing green again
4. Reference the Owner's Manual to remove old collar information
5. Reference the Owner's Manual to repair the collar The collar has now been reset and is ready for use. If the collar did not reset you may want to try the sequence again. It may be necessary to leave the device outside with a clear view of the sky for 20 minutes to acquire satellites.
Master reset for TT15, TT10, T5 and DC-50 Dog Tracking Collars
If your TT15, TT10, T5 or DC-50 collar is failing to operate as expected, corrupt data may be the cause. Performing a master reset will reset the collar to factory settings and clear data, resolving issues caused by corrupt data. NOTE: While it is safe to perform a master reset on a MAC with these collars, it is not safe to update the software on a MAC. Please update the software of the collars using a Windows-based computer. To perform a master reset:
2. Connect charging clip to collar
3. Connect USB cable to collar
4. Connect USB cable to power source (computer, AC wall adapter)
5. Ensure collar light is active to confirm connection
6. Firmly press the power button 4 times (each button press should produce a quiet tone from the collar)
7. Wait for light to turn green then red
8. Disconnect USB cable and charging clip from collar
9. Reference the Owner's Manual to remove old collar information
10. Reference the Owner's Manual to repair the collar The collar has now been reset and is ready for use. If the collar did not reset you may want to try the sequence again and ensure you are hearing the quiet tone after each button press. It may be necessary to leave the device outside with a clear view of the sky for 20 minutes to acquire satellites.]]>
Voltage: 3.7VDC
Amperage: 1960mAh
Watt Hours: 7.25]]>
ALPHA LTE Stops Range Problems
-- Losing radio signal on a regular basis?-- Alpha LTE fills those gaps and saves you time.
-- No more "back to the truck" to get the long-range antenna.
An annual $50 LTE subscription is required (per collar) to use the Alpha LTE.
Garmin ALPHA LTE Overview
- Track your dogs using LTE cellular technology for greater range.
- Pair with an Alpha VHF dog tracking system (see compatible systems below) to use both VHF and LTE tracking for extra range and safety.
- Smart Switching automatically changes between LTE and VHF to give you the best available signal on your paired Alpha handheld.
- See your dog's movements on your compatible smartphone with the Alpha app.
Garmin ALPHA LTE Features
- Track your dog using LTE cellphone networks for longer range
- Use with your smartphone as a standalone device or as a "companion" to a compatible Alpha VHF tracking system
- Pair your phone to your Garmin dog tracking system and hunt with a redundant tracking system that uses both LTE and VHF signals
- Smart switching technology automatically changes between LTE and VHF tracking to give you the best available signal on your Garmin dog tracking system
- Multi-GNSS lets you access multiple global navigation satellite systems to track with better reception and more accuracy than GPS alone
- Multicolor LED beacon lights help you see your dog in low-light conditions
- Rechargeable non-replaceable internal lithium-ion battery
- Built to withstand all the abuse your dog can give in the toughest outdoor conditions
- Use with the free Alpha smartphone app:
- See your dog's movements on your smartphone
- Navigate and mark waypoints with integrated mapping
- Configure your LTE dog tracker settings
- Use the optional Easyhunt app to plan, organize, and coordinate with your entire hunting party (additional subscription required)
- One year manufacturer warranty
- 1" collar strap optional
- $49.99 yearly subscription required per collar
Garmin ALPHA LTE Comes With
- Alpha LTE dog tracker
- Charging clip
- USB-C charging/data cable
- Owner's manual
- Optional 1" collar strap
Garmin ALPHA LTE by the Numbers
- Battery Type: Li-ion non-replaceable
- Weight: 1.8 oz
- Dimensions: 2.75"W x 1.4"H x 1.2"D
- Battery life Standalone:
- 10-second tracking: up to 11 hours
- Dynamic tracking: up to 18 hours
- 2-minute tracking: up to 45 hours
- Battery life paired with Alpha handheld ("Companion"):
- 10-second tracking: up to 12 hours
- Dynamic tracking: up to 32 hours
- 2-minute tracking: up to 75 hours
Garmin ALPHA LTE Compatibility
]]>Dog Tracking and Training Features:
- Pairs directly with your compatible ALPHA dog collars (no separate handheld required)
- Track and train up to 20 dogs within a 9-mile range (depending on collars used)
- See your dog's real-time position and activity
- Control 18 levels of STIM, tone, or vibration when paired with training-enabled collars
- Dog list and group management lets you save up to 250 dogs in memory so you don't have to retype their names for each hunt
- Channel View lets you easily select less congested collar frequencies to avoid interference
- Transfer location data between compatible Garmin devices
- Hunt Metrics show each dog's daily hunting patterns, distance, speed, and time afield
- Use with the ALPHA app to follow your dogs' movements, drop waypoints, navigate, and review statistics from your hunt on your smartphone
Map and Navigation Features:
- High-resolution 1280 x 800 10" touchscreen display
- View in portrait or landscape mode
- Use on or off the in-vehicle dock (10 ft. range connected via Bluetooth) for up to 2 hours of portable use
- Preloaded TopoActive maps feature not just major highways and waterways but smaller roads, creeks, and streams
- Downloadable satellite imagery
- Built-in 3-axis compass with barometric altimeter
- With an Outdoor Maps+ subscription, get regularly updated premium map content sent wirelessly to your ALPHA XL
ALPHA XL Comes With:
- ALPHA XL dog tracking GPS navigator
- 12V vehicle power cable
- USB-C charging/data cable
- Rugged suction cup mount with 1" ball and adjustable socket arm
- Vehicle charging/antenna dock with VHF antenna connector
- 17" magnetic roof mount VHF antenna
- Quick start manual
Specifications:
- 10" 1280 x 800 high-resolution screen with multi-touch glass
- Rechargeable lithium-ion battery (up to 2-hour battery life)
- 64GB internal memory plus MicroSD card slot -- add more memory by installing a blank MicroSD card
- Dimensions: 9 5/8"W x 6"H x 7/8"D
- ALPHA XL weight: 19.5 oz.
- Radio mount weight: 9 oz.
- Combined overall weight: 28.5 oz.
The Garmin Astro 900 is the only Garmin Dog Tracking GPS System that is legal in both Canada and the United States.
Garmin Astro 430 / 320 / 220, Alpha, and PRO 550+ GPS tracking handhelds and TT, T5 and DC series GPS collars use MURS band radio signals to transmit information back and forth to one another, and the use of this frequency band is subject to various national regulations. The Canadian government has restricted the use of these MURS band radio frequencies exclusively for commercial/industrial land mobile and public safety uses. In June 2009, Industry Canada announced that the MURS radio frequency used by the Astro, Alpha, and PRO 550+ would be allowed in Canada following a 5-year transition period. However, uncertainties were raised regarding the relative benefits of proceeding with MURS implementation in light of potential negative impacts to existing radio licensees. In June 2014, Industry Canada reversed its position, noting "the Department does not feel that the introduction of MURS devices in Canada is warranted at this time, and has decided to defer the introduction of MURS devices in Canada until a clearer indication of actual need is provided by Canadian MURS advocates and/or stakeholders." Garmin remains interested in offering the Alpha, Astro, and PRO 550+ to Canadian customers and will be contacting Industry Canada in support of that goal. Potential Canadian customers should also contact their local Industry Canada office to express their desire to have these products approved for use in Canada.To ensure compliance with local laws:
Garmin units with radio functionality that is disabled outside of the US:
Voltage: 4.2 VDC
Amperage: 400 mAh
Watt Hours: 1.68]]>
Compatible with the Following Systems:
How to Match Collars to Your Garmin Delta XC / SE System
Please read all steps before starting.
One-Handed Operation
Easily select from 10 levels of continuous or momentary stimulation with positive clicks between levels -- perfect for one-handed operation.Li-Ion Batteries
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries in both the handheld and receiver collar give you up to 60 hours of runtime.Expands to Two Dogs
Sliding selector switch lets you expand your DELTA SE to 2 dogs by adding an additional dog device. ]]>Includes USB-C cable, lanyard, and owner's manuals. Compatible with Delta SE, Delta XC, original Delta, and PRO PT10 receiver collars. The Garmin TriTronics Delta SE has an ergonomic handheld transmitter and a compact dog device receiver collar that are both rugged, waterproof, and reliable with a 1/2-mile range. Choose from 10 levels of continuous or momentary stimulation, non-stimulating tone, or vibration modes, giving you options based on the situation, your training preferences, or your dog's behavior.]]>
Voltage: 4.2 VDC
Amperage: 400 mAh
Watt Hours: 1.68]]>
Voltage: 3.7VDC
Amperage: 700mAh
Watt Hours: 2.59]]>
- "30 Day, No Risk, 100% Satisfaction Guarantee." If you don't like your Garmin collar, send it back and we'll either swap it with a better collar for you OR give you your money back. You'll be happy, either way.
- I'm here to take care of you. We've been around since 1972.
- Need help? Expert advice is only a phone call or email away.
- Get your Garmin / TriTronics collars fast, too!
- Questions? Read my new Dog Training Collars Buyer's Guide or call 1-800-624-6378.
Dog Tracking Features:
- Requires Alpha 300i, Alpha 300, Alpha 200 PLUS, Alpha 200i, Alpha 200, Alpha 100, Alpha 10, Astro 430, Astro 320, Astro 900, or PRO 550 PLUS handheld
- Easily pinpoint your dog's position on the easy-to-read 7-inch pinch-to-zoom display
- View and track up to 20 dogs at once
- Up to 2.5 second update rates
- GPS + Galileo receiver for imporoved signal reception
- Built-in compass
Map Features:
- Preloaded TOPO U.S. 100K plus detailed road maps of North America
- Add additional maps as needed
- Downloadable satellite imagery plus Birdseye and 3D terrain
- Free lifetime map updates and lifetime traffic
- Custom POIs (add additional points of interest)
- 1000 waypoints / favorites / locations
- Preloaded data from Foursquare and more
- Live traffic monitoring
- Built in Wi-Fi
- Tripadvisor helps you plan your travels (hotels, restaurants, etc.)
- Works with Garmin Fenix smart watches
Navigation Features:
- Voice-activated navigation plus Bluetooth hands-free calling
- Compatible with the Garmin Drive app on iOS and Android
- Customizable smartphone notifications (display calls, texts and other app alerts on nav screen)
- Speaks street names plus landmarks ("Garmin Real Directions")
- Lane assist (guides to proper lane for navigation)
- Driver alerts for increased awareness, including upcoming sharp curves, school zones, speed changes and more
- Junction view (displays junction signs)
- Route avoidance
- Speed limit indicator
- View upcoming points of interest along route
Included Accessories:
- Vehicle power cable / traffic data antenna
- Suction cup mount (also compatible with the Garmin Friction Mount)
- Cigarette lighter adapter (CLA)
- Quick start manual
Specifications:
- 7" screen (6"W x 3.5"H; 6.95" diag.) with pinch-to-zoom
- Multi-touch glass
- 1024 x 600 display resolution
- 16GB internal memory plus microSD card slot -- add more memory by installing a blank MicroSD Card
- Dimensions: 6.97"W x 4.17"H x .75"D
- Weight: 8.5 oz
- Rechargeable lithium-ion battery (up to 1.5 hour battery life) ]]>
Compatible with:
3. Power on your Garmin watch while continuing to hold back/lap
5. Select Yes
The reset is successful if your Garmin watch finishes powering up and goes to the setup wizard. Try the steps again if the setup wizard does not appear. Following the reset, place the device outside with a clear view of the sky for a minimum of 20 minutes to acquire satellite data.
2. Press and hold the down, start, and back buttons
3. Power on your Garmin watch while holding these buttons
4. After the first beep release the start button
5. After the second beep release the remaining buttons The watch should now be reset.
**If your Garmin watch will not power off, press and hold Light until the screen goes blank. This causes the device to power off and should only be used when a normal power down is not possible.]]>
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
Garmin Hunt View PLUS Maps Overview
microSD/SD Card Requirements
The rugged Garmin Instinct-E GPS Smartwatch stands out with a 40 mm high-strength case and scratch-resistant display. It is 10 ATM water-rated and engineered to MIL-STD-810 for thermal and shock resistance.
Garmin Instinct E GPS Smartwatch Features
- See dog tracking information on your watch when connected to your Alpha 300i / 300 / 200+ / 200i / 200 / 100 / 10, Astro 430 / 900, or PRO 550 PLUS
- Up to 14 days battery life in Smartwatch mode, up to 21 hours in GPS mode, and up to 43 hours in Max Battery GPS mode
- Built-in 3-axis compass and barometric altimeter
- Multiple global navigation satellite systems (GPS, GLONASS, and Galileo) for added accuracy
- Health and wellness monitoring includes heart rate, advanced sleep monitoring, Pulse Ox2, and more
- Built-in sports apps track your activities, including walking, running, cycling, hiking, strength training, and more
- Smart Notifications let you receive emails, texts, and alerts on your watch when paired with your compatible Apple or Android smartphone
- Chemically-strengthened glass lens with fiber-reinforced polymer bezel and case
Garmin Instinct E GPS Smartwatch Includes
- Garmin Instinct E Smartwatch
- Charcoal silicone band
- USB-C charging / data cable
- Quick start manual
Monitor and Train
The Instinct E GPS Smartwatch monitors your health, including heart rate, advanced sleep monitoring, Pulse Ox2 and more. Use the preloaded sports apps to track your activities, including walking, running, cycling, hiking, strength training, and more.Stay Connected
Smart notifications let you receive emails, texts, and alerts right on your watch, even if you're on the trail. Instinct receives the wireless signal from a compatible Apple or Android smartphone and lets you know when you have a message, displaying the text on its screen whenever you're ready to read it.Specifications
- Watch face size: 1 3/4"
- Dimensions: 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/2"
- Display size: .86" diameter
- Display resolution: 166 x 166 pixels
- Band width: 7/8"
- Band length: 8"
- Fits up to: 7" wrist
- Weight: 1.4 oz.
- Battery life: Up to 14 days in smartwatch mode (depending on settings, up to 21 hours in GPS mode, and up to 43 hours in Max Battery GPS mode)
- Rechargeable Li-ion battery
- Water rating: 10 ATM
- High-sensitivity GPS / GLONASS / Galileo receiver
- Memory: 128 MB
- Time/Date
- GPS Time Sync
- Automatic daylight saving time
- Alarm clock
- Timer
- Stopwatch
- Sunrise/sunset times
- Wrist-based heart rate
- Resting heart rate
- Abnormal heart rate alerts
- Respiration rate
- Fitness age
- Body Battery energy monitor
- All-day stress
- Relaxation reminders
- Relaxation breathing timer
- Breathwork
- Sleep monitoring (monitors total sleep and periods of movement or restful sleep)
- Breathing variations
- Nap detection
- Hydration
- Women's health tracking
- Health snapshot
- GPS / GLONASS / Galileo
- Garmin Elevate wrist heart rate monitor
- Pulse Ox blood oxygen saturation monitor
- Barometric altimeter
- Compass
- Accelerometer
- Thermometer
- Bluetooth, ANT+
- Connect IQ with on-device Connect iQ Store
- Smart notifications
- Text response/reject phone call with text (Android only)
- Morning Report
- Calendar
- Weather
- Battery Saver
- Controls smartphone music
- Find My Phone
- Find My Watch
- Passcode
- VIRB Camera Remote
- iPhone and Android compatibility
- Compatible with Garmin Connect Mobile
- Garmin Share
- Garmin Running Coach Experts
- Garmin Coach - Prebuilt Cycling Plans
- Daily Suggested Workout - Running (Pace and Heart Rate Based)
- Daily Suggested Workout - Cycling (Pace and Heart Rate Based)
- Cardio workouts
- Strength workouts
- HIIT workouts
- Yoga workouts
- Pilates workouts
- Gym - Strength, HIIT, Cardio, Elliptical Training, Stair Stepping, Floor Climbing, Indoor Rowing
- Wellness - Walking, Pilates, Yoga
- Indoor Running - Treadmill Running, Indoor Track Running, Virtual Running
- Outdoor Running - Running, Outdoor Track Running, Trail Running
- Outdoor Recreation - Hiking, Climbing, Hunting, Horseback Riding, Archery
- Cycling - Biking, Road Biking, Mountain Biking, Gravel Biking, Bike Commuting, Bike Touring, eBiking, eMountain Biking, Indoor Biking, Cyclocross, BMX
- Swim - Pool Swimming, Open Water Swimming
- On the Water - Stand Up Paddleboarding, Rowing, Kayaking, Fishing, Boating, Whitewater
- Racket Sports - Tennis, Pickleball, Badminton, Squash, Table Tennis, Padel, Platform Tennis, Racquetball
- Snow and Winter - Skiing, Snowboarding, XC Classic Skiing, XC Skate Skiing, Ice Skating, Snowshoeing
- Team Sports - Basketball, Volleyball, Field Hockey, Ice Hockey, Football/Soccer, American Football, Lacrosse, Rugby, Ultimate Disc, Cricket, Softball, Baseball
- Other Activity Profiles - Tactical
- Incident Detection during select activities
- Incident detection alert on phone for wearables
- Assistance
- Live event sharing
- Dual-grid coordinates
- Xero locations
- Step counter
- Move alerts (displays on device after a period of inactivity; walk for a couple of minutes to reset it)
- Auto goal (learns your activity level and assigns a daily step goal)
- Calories burned
- Floors climbed
- Distance traveled
- Intensity minutes
- TrueUp
- Move IQ
- Auto Rep Count
The rugged Garmin Instinct-E GPS Smartwatch stands out with a 45 mm high-strength case and scratch-resistant display. It is 10 ATM water-rated and engineered to MIL-STD-810 for thermal and shock resistance.
Garmin Instinct E GPS Smartwatch Features
- See dog tracking information on your watch when connected to your Alpha 300i / 300 / 200+ / 200i / 200 / 100 / 10, Astro 430 / 900, or PRO 550 PLUS
- Up to 16 days battery life in Smartwatch mode, up to 24 hours in GPS mode, and up to 50 hours in Max Battery GPS mode
- Built-in 3-axis compass and barometric altimeter
- Multiple global navigation satellite systems (GPS, GLONASS, and Galileo) for added accuracy
- Health and wellness monitoring includes heart rate, advanced sleep monitoring, Pulse Ox2, and more
- Built-in sports apps track your activities, including walking, running, cycling, hiking, strength training, and more
- Smart Notifications let you receive emails, texts, and alerts on your watch when paired with your compatible Apple or Android smartphone
- Chemically-strengthened glass lens with fiber-reinforced polymer bezel and case
Garmin Instinct E GPS Smartwatch Includes
- Garmin Instinct E Smartwatch
- Charcoal silicone band
- USB-C charging / data cable
- Quick start manual
Monitor and Train
The Instinct E GPS Smartwatch monitors your health, including heart rate, advanced sleep monitoring, Pulse Ox2, and more. Use the preloaded sports apps to track your activities, including walking, running, cycling, hiking, strength training, and more.Stay Connected
Smart notifications let you receive emails, texts, and alerts right on your watch, even if you're on the trail. Instinct receives the wireless signal from a compatible Apple or Android smartphone and lets you know when you have a message, displaying the text on its screen whenever you're ready to read it.Specifications
- Watch face size: 1 3/4"
- Dimensions: 1 3/4" x 1 3/4" x 1/2"
- Display size: 0.9" diameter
- Display resolution: 176 x 176 pixels
- Band width: 7/8"
- Band length: 9 1/2"
- Fits up to: 8 1/4" wrist
- Weight: 1.7 oz.
- Battery life: Up to 16 days in smartwatch mode (depending on settings, up to 24 hours in GPS mode, and up to 50 hours in Max Battery GPS mode)
- Rechargeable Li-ion battery
- Water rating: 10 ATM
- High-sensitivity GPS / GLONASS / Galileo receiver
- Memory: 128 MB
- Time/Date
- GPS Time Sync
- Automatic daylight saving time
- Alarm clock
- Timer
- Stopwatch
- Sunrise/sunset times
- Wrist-based heart rate
- Resting heart rate
- Abnormal heart rate alerts
- Respiration rate
- Fitness age
- Body Battery energy monitor
- All-day stress
- Relaxation reminders
- Relaxation breathing timer
- Breathwork
- Sleep monitoring (monitors total sleep and periods of movement or restful sleep)
- Breathing variations
- Nap detection
- Hydration
- Women's health tracking
- Health snapshot
- GPS / GLONASS / Galileo
- Garmin Elevate wrist heart rate monitor
- Pulse Ox blood oxygen saturation monitor
- Barometric altimeter
- Compass
- Accelerometer
- Thermometer
- Bluetooth, ANT+
- Connect IQ with on-device Connect iQ Store
- Smart notifications
- Text response/reject phone call with text (Android only)
- Morning Report
- Calendar
- Weather
- Battery Saver
- Controls smartphone music
- Find My Phone
- Find My Watch
- Passcode
- VIRB Camera Remote
- iPhone and Android compatibility
- Compatible with Garmin Connect Mobile
- Garmin Share
- Garmin Running Coach Experts
- Garmin Coach - Prebuilt Cycling Plans
- Daily Suggested Workout - Running (Pace and Heart Rate Based)
- Daily Suggested Workout - Cycling (Pace and Heart Rate Based)
- Cardio workouts
- Strength workouts
- HIIT workouts
- Yoga workouts
- Pilates workouts
- Gym - Strength, HIIT, Cardio, Elliptical Training, Stair Stepping, Floor Climbing, Indoor Rowing
- Wellness - Walking, Pilates, Yoga
- Indoor Running - Treadmill Running, Indoor Track Running, Virtual Running
- Outdoor Running - Running, Outdoor Track Running, Trail Running
- Outdoor Recreation - Hiking, Climbing, Hunting, Horseback Riding, Archery
- Cycling - Biking, Road Biking, Mountain Biking, Gravel Biking, Bike Commuting, Bike Touring, eBiking, eMountain Biking, Indoor Biking, Cyclocross, BMX
- Swim - Pool Swimming, Open Water Swimming
- On the Water - Stand Up Paddleboarding, Rowing, Kayaking, Fishing, Boating, Whitewater
- Racket Sports - Tennis, Pickleball, Badminton, Squash, Table Tennis, Padel, Platform Tennis, Racquetball
- Snow and Winter - Skiing, Snowboarding, XC Classic Skiing, XC Skate Skiing, Ice Skating, Snowshoeing
- Team Sports - Basketball, Volleyball, Field Hockey, Ice Hockey, Football/Soccer, American Football, Lacrosse, Rugby, Ultimate Disc, Cricket, Softball, Baseball
- Other Activity Profiles - Tactical
- Incident Detection during select activities
- Incident detection alert on phone for wearables
- Assistance
- Live event sharing
- Dual-grid coordinates
- Xero locations
- Step counter
- Move alerts (displays on device after a period of inactivity; walk for a couple of minutes to reset it)
- Auto goal (learns your activity level and assigns a daily step goal)
- Calories burned
- Floors climbed
- Distance traveled
- Intensity minutes
- TrueUp
- Move IQ
- Auto Rep Count
Voltage: 3.7VDC
Amperage: 1100mAh
Watt Hours: 4.1 If your system is less than 1 year old contact Garmin before ordering replacement batteries. 1-800-800-1020.]]>
Specifications: Rechargeable Li-ion
Voltage: 3.6 VDC
Amperage: 3250 mAh
Watt Hours: 11.7 If your system is less than 1 year old contact Garmin before ordering replacement batteries. 1-800-800-1020.
Installation Instructions:
Please read all steps before starting. Before you replace the battery, be sure to remove all dirt, water, and debris from the collar. Tools Needed: You will need a small Phillips screwdriver and possibly a small flat screwdriver to connect the connectors.
]]>
Garmin PRO 550 2-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO 550 3-dog Comes With:
PRO 550 PLUS Handheld Master Reset
NOTE: This procedure removes all paired dog collar devices from your handheld device. After resetting your handheld device, you must complete the pairing process for each collar again. To perform the master reset:
Master Reset for T5 MINI and TT15 MINI Dog Tracking Collars
If your T5 MINI or TT15 MINI collar is failing to operate as expected, corrupt data may be the cause. Performing a master reset will reset the collar to factory settings and clear data, resolving issues caused by corrupt data. To perform a master reset:2. Rapidly press the power Button 8 times.
3. Wait for light to turn solid red then begin flashing green again.
4. Reference the Owner's Manual to remove old collar information.
5. Reference the Owner's Manual to repair the collar. The collar has now been reset and is ready for use. If the collar did not reset you may want to try the sequence again. It may be necessary to leave the device outside with a clear view of the sky for 20 minutes to acquire satellites.
Master reset for TT15, TT10, T5 and DC-50 Dog Tracking Collars
If your TT15, TT10, T5 or DC-50 collar is failing to operate as expected, corrupt data may be the cause. Performing a master reset will reset the collar to factory settings and clear data, resolving issues caused by corrupt data. NOTE: While it is safe to perform a master reset on a MAC with these collars, it is not safe to update the software on a MAC. Please update the software of the collars using a Windows based computer. To perform a master reset:2. Connect charging clip to collar.
3. Connect USB cable to collar.
4. Connect USB cable to power source (computer, AC wall adapter).
5. Ensure collar light is active to confirm connection.
6. Firmly press the power button 4 times (each button press should produce a quiet tone from the collar).
7. Wait for light to turn green then red.
8. Disconnect USB cable and charging clip from collar.
9. Reference the Owner's Manual to remove old collar information.
10. Reference the Owner's Manual to repair the collar. The collar has now been reset and is ready for use. If the collar did not reset you may want to try the sequence again and ensure you are hearing the quiet tone after each button press. It may be necessary to leave the device outside with a clear view of the sky for 20 minutes to acquire satellites.]]>
An E-collar that Includes GPS Tracking
Everything we've had up to this point has been GPS systems that included e-collar functions. The main product in that category is the Garmin ALPHA. The Garmin PRO 550+ is an e-collar that has traditional e-collar features that includes tracking. The beauty of this is it gives you the functionality that you need with an e-collar:It Has a Very Simple Screen
It shows you:Who should use the PRO 550 PLUS?
The Garmin PRO 550 PLUS is designed for a couple of different folks:- Those looking for more functionality out of their e-collar system:
- Easily raise and lower STIM
- Easily change dogs
- No-look operation
- Less complexity
- Easy to operate
- No menus to navigate
- No touchscreen
Operation is VERY Simple
REGULAR & MINI
The Garmin PRO 550 PLUS comes in two versions -- the regular version with the TT15X collar, and the MINI version with the MINI TT15 collar. You can combine MINIs and regulars on the same system if you have big dogs and small dogs. The biggest difference between these two collars is going to be BATTERY LIFE.- REGULAR -- 25 hours @ 2.5 second update
- MINI -- 16 hours @ 2.5 second update
- Over 40 pounds = REGULAR collar
- Under 40 pounds = MINI collar
PRO 550 PLUS vs. PRO 550
STIM LEVELS The PRO 550 PLUS has 18 stimulation levels compared to 21 on the PRO 550. This is because the TT15X collars are based on the ALPHA system, which also has 18 levels. RANGE The PRO 550 PLUS works on the MURS frequency band, whereas the PRO 550 works on the 27-MHz frequency band, so the PRO 550 PLUS will get more range for both tracking and training. The stated range on the Garmin PRO 550 PLUS is 2 miles, compared to 1 mile on the Garmin PRO 550. Terrain plays a big factor. In my tests with the Garmin PRO 550 PLUS, at times we were getting more than a 2-mile range. You can add a Car Top Antenna or one of the longer Extended Range Antennas to get even more range. BATTERY LIFE The PRO 550 PLUS has less battery life than the standard PRO 550. The PRO 550 PLUS handheld gets around 24 hours of run time, and TT15X collars get around 25 hours of run time with a 2.5-second update rate. Compare that to a PRO 550, where you will get 60-80 hours from the collar, and substantially longer from the handheld because there's not an enormous amount going on unless you're pressing buttons. One of the biggest adjustments in moving from a regular PRO 550 to a PRO 550 PLUS is needing to charge your handheld nightly. BARK LIMITER MODE The regular Garmin PRO 550 has a Bark Limiter mode that you can set on the collar. The PRO 550 PLUS does not. COMPATIBILITY- PRO 550 PLUS collars are NOT compatible with regular PRO 550 collars.
- The PRO 550 PLUS IS compatible with the Garmin ALPHA. They work off the same frequencies and the collars are identical.
- It is also compatible with the Garmin ASTRO handheld and collars (tracking only)
- It is compatible with older TT15 and TT10 collars.
Garmin PRO 70 2-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO 70 3-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO 70 4-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO 70 5-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO 70 6-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Bark Collar Bundle Overview
The Garmin PRO Bark Collar is able to distinguish between barking and other vocalizations by using innovative "Advanced Bark Correction Technology" powered by micro electro-mechanical acceleration sensors. It delivers consistent and instantaneous correction, virtually eliminating false corrections caused by external noises.Garmin PRO Bark Collar Bundle Features:
Autorise Stimulation
- Autorise Stimulation mode automatically increases the stimulation to the correct level as your dog barks. It will also increase levels if a high distraction situation causes your dog to bark excessively. This way you do not have to go through the task of testing levels to see what your dog needs.
How Autorise works: The Autorise feature starts at level 1 when the unit is turned on. When your dog barks he will get a correction on level 1. If he barks again he will get a second correction on level 1. If he barks a third time, the unit will increase stimulation by two levels. If your dog continues to bark he will get two corrections at the new level before the collar increases two more levels. Once the collar reaches the needed level to get the dog to stop barking, it will slowly lower the stimulation by one level at a time. If your dog barks again while the unit is at the lower level, the unit will start at that level and then increase again as needed. Over time, the unit will return to level 1 once your dog has stopped barking for an extended period of time.
Bark Odometer
- The Bark Odometer counts the number of times your dog is corrected while wearing the collar and counts them back to you when you turn the unit off. To activate the Odometer, hold the power button until the unit turns off. The Odometer will then flash the number of corrections since the last time the unit was turned on. A red flash=10 barks and a green flash=1 bark.
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Batteries
- The rechargeable PRO Bark Collar approximately has 60-hour battery life. This will vary depending on how much your dog barks while wearing the collar and how many hours a day your dog wears the collar. The batteries are user-replaceable and last 3-5 years with proper care.
Battery Strength Indicator
- The color of the light will tell you the condition of the battery. Green means "good," yellow means "charge," and red means "dead." The unit will work in yellow mode but immediate attention is recommended. The unit will not work at all when the light is red.
Interchangeable Contact Points
- Includes long and short standard probes plus long and short extended wear comfort probes.
Waterproof Plastic Lexan Molded Case
- Built to withstand all kinds of training conditions with no exposed charging ports to gather debris and no covers to remove for charging.
Add Remote Training Functions Later
- Think you might need a remote training collar down the road? The PRO Bark Collar Bundle gives you the option of adding a PRO series handheld later if you need it. Compatible units include:
Specifications:
Garmin PRO Bark Collar Bundle Includes:
Voltage: 3.6 VDC
Amperage: 2900 mAh
Watt Hours: 10.44]]>
Voltage: 3.7 VDC
Amperage: 820 mAh
Watt Hours: 3.03]]>
Voltage: 3.7 VDC
Amperage: 1900 mAh
Watt Hours: 7.0]]>
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 2-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 3-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 4-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 5-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 6-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 7-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 8-dog Comes With:
Garmin PRO Trashbreaker 9-dog Comes With:
How to Match Collars to Your Trashbreaker System
Please read all steps before starting.
NOTE: When adding a receiver for dogs 1 - 3, use the button that matches the strap color and place the dog selection switch in the UP position. When adding a receiver for dogs 4 - 6, use the button inside the colored circle on the yellow faceplate that matches the strap color and place the dog selection switch in the DOWN position. When adding a receiver for dogs 7 - 9, use the button with the colored circle printed on its edge that matches the strap color and place the dog selection switch in the MIDDLE position.]]>
How to Match Collars to Your PRO System
Please read all steps before starting.
Note for PRO 70 Users: When adding a receiver for dogs 1 - 3, use the button that matches the strap color and place the dog selection switch in the UP position. When adding a receiver for dogs 4 - 6, use the button inside the colored circle that matches the strap color and place the dog selection switch in the DOWN position.]]>
One-year warranty on all units!
]]>
Voltage: 3.7VDC
Amperage: 820mAh
Watt Hours: 3.03]]>
Garmin Sport PRO 2-dog Comes With:
Garmin Sport PRO 3-dog Comes With:
Garmin T20 Features:
- Dynamic Tracking auto-adjusts the collar update rate based on your dog's activity (less movement=lower update rate) to extend the battery life to approx. 68 hours on a single charge
- Multi-colored remotely activated LED light beacons let you easily ID your dogs in low light conditions with 7 color options: white, yellow, magenta, cyan, green, red, and blue
- User-replaceable flex band reduces downtime if your collar gets damaged
- Multi-colored collar status indicator
- Blue: pairing mode
- Yellow: acquiring GPS signal
- Green: GPS signal established
- Red: low battery
- WiFi connectivity allows collar software to auto-update while charging
- "One-size-fits-most" collar design can be comfortably worn by both small and large dogs
- Remotely activated Sleep Mode further extends battery life (only with Alpha handhelds)
- Waterproof (1 ATM -- 10 meters)
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver gives better signal reception than GPS alone
- VIRB control on the collar lets you start or stop VIRB video recording with the Alpha handheld (VIRB camera not included)
- User-replaceable 1" collar strap fits neck sizes between 11.5" and 22"
- 22 1/2" long-range braided steel collar antenna takes all the abuse a hunting dog can give it
- USB-C port on collar for manual software updates via Garmin Express and exporting additional GPS dog data
- Dimensions: 1.4" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
- Weight: 8.8 oz. with collar strap and antenna
- ALPHA 300i / 300 / 200i / 200 / 100 / 10 (tracking function only)
- PRO 550 PLUS (tracking function only, limited to 2.5-second update rate, default beacon light color)
- ASTRO 430
- NOT compatible with Astro 320 or 220 handhelds
- Up to 68 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 25 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 84 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Up to 136 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 50 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 168 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Steel braided antenna
- USB-C cable
- Collar charging clip
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
AKC Competition Approved The AKC Performance Events Department has approved the Garmin T20 collar for use in pointing breed field trials and hunting tests.
Not available to Canadian addresses. This product is approved for use in the US only. Collar-to-handheld radio communication may be disabled in Europe and other prohibited areas.
How to Match Collars to Your Alpha
Please read all steps before starting. To pair wirelessly, the dog collar device must be within range of the Alpha handheld.
How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your PRO 550 PLUS
Please read all steps before starting.
BEACON LIGHTS
Remote controlled Beacon Lights help you locate your dog in low light.BUILT-IN BARK COLLAR
The built-in BarkLimiter (activated on the receiver collar) helps keep your kennel a little quieter when you get back home.EXPAND TO 3-DOGS
Expandable to 3 dogs (additional receiver collars available separately). ]]>One-handed operation
The PRO 70 gives you one-handed functionality so you don't have to take your eyes off your dog. The simple "one button per dog" controls are color coded to match each dog's collar, and the top-mounted dial lets you choose from 6 levels of stimulation plus tone.Expands to 6 dogs
The PRO 70 can be expanded up to 6 dogs with additional collars -- just flip the toggle switch to select dogs 1-3 or 4-6.Beacon Lights
Remote operated Beacon Lights built in to the receiver collar help you locate your dog in low light situations.Built-in Bark Limiter
The built-in BarkLimiter (activated on the receiver collar) helps keep your kennel a little quieter when you get back home.]]>Four Button Design
Four training buttons give you instant control over continuous and momentary stimulation, vibration and tone.Built-in Bark Limiter
Remotely control the built-in BarkLimiter with settable levels.Beacon Lights
Remote controlled Beacon Lights help you locate your dog in low light conditions.Li-Ion Batteries
Rechargeable, user-replaceable Li-ion batteries in both the handheld and receiver collar give you up to 60 hours of runtime.Expands to Three Dogs
Expandable for training up to 3 dogs by adding additional dog devices. ]]>-->
Customize your TT25 with your choice of:
- Standard or Extended Life Battery
- Regular, MINI, or Ruggedized Flex Band
- Collar Strap Color
Garmin TT25 Features:
- Dynamic Tracking auto-adjusts the collar update rate based on your dog's activity (less movement=lower update rate) to extend the battery life to approx. 68 hours on a single charge
- Multi-colored remotely activated LED light beacons let you easily ID your dogs in low light conditions with 7 color options: white, yellow, magenta, cyan, green, red, and blue
- User-replaceable flex band reduces downtime if your collar gets damaged
- Multi-colored collar status indicator
- Blue: pairing mode
- Yellow: acquiring GPS signal
- Green: GPS signal established
- Red: low battery
- WiFi connectivity allows collar software to auto-update while charging
- "One-size-fits-most" collar design can be comfortably worn by both small and large dogs
- Remotely activated Sleep Mode further extends battery life (only with Alpha handhelds)
- Waterproof (1 ATM -- 10 meters)
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver gives better signal reception than GPS alone
- VIRB control on the collar lets you start or stop VIRB video recording with the Alpha handheld (VIRB camera not included)
- 18 levels of both continuous and momentary stimulation
- Non-stimulating vibration function
- Non-stimulating tone function
- User-replaceable 1" collar strap fits neck sizes between 11.5" and 22"
- 22 1/2" long-range braided steel collar antenna takes all the abuse a hunting dog can give it
- USB-C port on collar for manual software updates via Garmin Express and exporting additional GPS dog data
- Dimensions: 1.4" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
- Weight: 8.8 oz. with collar strap and antenna
- ALPHA 300i / 300 / 200i / 200 / 100 / 10
- PRO 550 PLUS
- ASTRO 430 (tracking function only)
- NOT compatible with Astro 320 or 220 handhelds
- Up to 68 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 25 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 84 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Up to 136 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 50 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 168 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Your choice of Standard, MINI, or Ruggedized (+$30) flex band
- Your choice of Regular or Extended Life (+$80) battery
- 1" collar strap in your choice of color
- Steel braided antenna
- USB-C cable
- Collar charging clip
- Short and long contact point sets with wrench
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your Alpha
Please read all steps before starting. To pair wirelessly, the dog collar device must be within range of the Alpha handheld.
How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your PRO 550 PLUS
Please read all steps before starting.
- Regular, MINI, or Ruggedized Flex Band
- Collar Strap Color
- Integrated remote beeper
- Compatible with Alpha 300/200/10 series and PRO 550 PLUS handhelds
- Audibly track your dog's movements, such as running or "on point."
- Manually activate to find your dog in locate mode
- Choose from 5 different sounds:
- Single beep
- Double beep
- Triple beep
- Low beep
- Hawk sound
- Dynamic Tracking auto-adjusts the collar update rate based on your dog's activity (less movement=lower update rate) to extend the battery life to approx. 78 hours on a single charge
- Multi-colored remotely activated LED light beacons let you easily ID your dogs in low light conditions with 7 color options: white, yellow, magenta, cyan, green, red, and blue
- User-replaceable flex band reduces downtime if your collar gets damaged
- Multi-colored collar status indicator
- Blue: pairing mode
- Yellow: acquiring GPS signal
- Green: GPS signal established
- Red: low battery
- WiFi connectivity allows collar software to auto-update while charging
- "One-size-fits-most" collar design can be comfortably worn by both small and large dogs
- Remotely activated Sleep Mode further extends battery life (only with Alpha handhelds)
- Waterproof (1 ATM -- 10 meters)
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver gives better signal reception than GPS alone
- VIRB control on the collar lets you start or stop VIRB video recording with the Alpha handheld (VIRB camera not included)
- 18 levels of both continuous and momentary stimulation
- Non-stimulating vibration function
- Non-stimulating tone function
- User-replaceable 1" collar strap fits neck sizes between 11.5" and 22"
- 22 1/2" long-range braided steel collar antenna takes all the abuse a hunting dog can give it
- USB-C port on collar for manual software updates via Garmin Express and exporting additional GPS dog data
- Dimensions: 1.4" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
- Weight: 12 oz. with collar strap and antenna
- ALPHA 300 / 200 / 10 Series
- PRO 550 PLUS
- NOT compatible with Astro handhelds
- Up to 78 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 25 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 84 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Integrated beeper battery pack
- 1" collar strap in your choice of color
- Steel braided antenna
- USB-C cable
- Collar charging clip
- Short and long contact point sets with wrench
- Set of screws
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your Alpha
Please read all steps before starting. To pair wirelessly, the dog collar device must be within range of the Alpha handheld.How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your PRO 550 PLUS
Please read all steps before starting.
- Extended-life battery gives up to 136 hours runtime using dynamic tracking
- Dynamic Tracking auto-adjusts the collar update rate based on your dog's activity (less movement=lower update rate) to extend the battery life to approx. 68 hours on a single charge
- Multi-colored remotely activated LED light beacons let you easily ID your dogs in low light conditions with 7 color options: white, yellow, magenta, cyan, green, red, and blue
- User-replaceable flex band reduces downtime if your collar gets damaged
- Multi-colored collar status indicator
- Blue: pairing mode
- Yellow: acquiring GPS signal
- Green: GPS signal established
- Red: low battery
- WiFi connectivity allows collar software to auto-update while charging
- "One-size-fits-most" collar design can be comfortably worn by both small and large dogs
- Remotely activated Sleep Mode further extends battery life (only with Alpha handhelds)
- Waterproof (1 ATM -- 10 meters)
- Top-mounted, high-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver gives better signal reception than GPS alone
- VIRB control on the collar lets you start or stop VIRB video recording with the Alpha handheld (VIRB camera not included)
- 18 levels of both continuous and momentary stimulation
- Non-stimulating vibration function
- Non-stimulating tone function
- User-replaceable 1" collar strap fits neck sizes between 11.5" and 21"
- 22 1/2" long-range braided steel collar antenna takes all the abuse a hunting dog can give it
- USB-C port on collar for manual software updates via Garmin Express and exporting additional GPS dog data
- Dimensions: 1.75" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
- Weight: 10.4 oz. with collar strap and antenna
- ALPHA 300i / 300 / 200i / 200 / 100 / 10
- PRO 550 PLUS (limited to 2.5-second update rate only, default beacon light color)
- ASTRO 430 (tracking function only)
- NOT compatible with Astro 320 or 220 handhelds
- Up to 136 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 50 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 168 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Steel braided antenna
- USB-C cable
- Collar charging clip
- Short and long contact point sets with wrench
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
How to Assemble your TT25 EXT
Please read all steps before starting.
How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your Alpha
Please read all steps before starting. To pair wirelessly, the dog collar device must be within range of the Alpha handheld.How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your PRO 550 PLUS
Please read all steps before starting.- Zero-length GPS antenna keeper fits small dogs better and more comfortably
- Dynamic Tracking auto-adjusts the collar update rate based on your dog's activity (less movement=lower update rate) to extend the battery life to approx. 68 hours on a single charge
- Multi-colored remotely activated LED light beacons let you easily ID your dogs in low light conditions with 7 color options: white, yellow, magenta, cyan, green, red, and blue
- User-replaceable flex band reduces downtime if your collar gets damaged
- Multi-colored collar status indicator
- Blue: pairing mode
- Yellow: acquiring GPS signal
- Green: GPS signal established
- Red: low battery
- WiFi connectivity allows collar software to auto-update while charging
- Remotely activated Sleep Mode further extends battery life (only with Alpha handhelds)
- Waterproof (1 ATM -- 10 meters)
- High-sensitivity GPS / Galileo receiver gives better signal reception than GPS alone
- VIRB control on the collar lets you start or stop VIRB video recording with the Alpha handheld (VIRB camera not included)
- 18 levels of both continuous and momentary stimulation
- Non-stimulating vibration function
- Non-stimulating tone function
- User-replaceable 1" collar strap fits neck sizes between 7" and 22"
- 22 1/2" long-range braided steel collar antenna takes all the abuse a hunting dog can give it
- USB-C port on collar for manual software updates via Garmin Express and exporting additional GPS dog data
- Dimensions with standard battery: 1.4" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
- Dimensions with extended battery: 1.75" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
- Weighs 8.8 oz. with standard battery, collar strap, and antenna
- Weighs 10.4 oz. with extended battery, collar strap, and antenna
- ALPHA 300i / 300 / 200i / 200 / 100 / 10
- PRO 550 PLUS (limited to 2.5-second update rate only, default beacon light color)
- ASTRO 430 (tracking function only)
- NOT compatible with Astro 320 or 220 handhelds
- Up to 68 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 25 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 84 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Up to 136 hours using dynamic tracking (default)
- Up to 50 hours with location updates every 2.5 seconds
- Up to 168 hours with location updates every 2 minutes
- Steel braided antenna
- USB-C cable
- Collar charging clip
- Short and long contact point sets with wrench
- Owner's manual
- 1-year Garmin warranty
How to Assemble your TT25 MINI
Please read all steps before starting.
How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your Alpha
Please read all steps before starting. To pair wirelessly, the dog collar device must be within range of the Alpha handheld.How to Pair Additional Garmin Collars to Your PRO 550 PLUS
Please read all steps before starting.60-day warranty on all units! ]]>
Garmin Bark Limiter Deluxe Overview
The Garmin / Tri-Tronics BarkLimiter Deluxe Rechargeable Bark Collar is able to distinguish between barking and other vocalizations by using innovative "Advanced Bark Correction Technology" powered by micro electro-mechanical acceleration sensors. It delivers consistent and instantaneous correction, virtually eliminating false corrections caused by external noises. You can either choose the convenient Autorise setting that automatically programs the stimulation intensity level based on the barking behavior of each individual dog, or choose manual or vibration options for alternative modes of correction. This lightweight, compact no-bark collar is the perfect training tool for any dog with a nuisance barking problem. It works right out of the box with no additional set-up required!Garmin Bark Limiter Deluxe Features:
Autorise Stimulation
- Autorise Stimulation mode automatically increases the stimulation to the correct level as your dog barks. It will also increase levels if a high distraction situation causes your dog to bark excessively. This way you do not have to go through the task of testing levels to see what your dog needs.
How Autorise works: The Autorise feature starts at level 1 when the unit is turned on. When your dog barks he will get a correction on level 1. If he barks again he will get a second correction on level 1. If he barks a third time, the unit will increase stimulation by two levels. If your dog continues to bark he will get two corrections at the new level before the collar increases two more levels. Once the collar reaches the needed level to get the dog to stop barking, it will slowly lower the stimulation by one level at a time. If your dog barks again while the unit is at the lower level, the unit will start at that level and then increase again as needed. Over time, the unit will return to level 1 once your dog has stopped barking for an extended period of time.
Vibration Mode
- The Bark Limiter has a vibration setting on the dial. Instead of correcting your dog with static stimulation when he barks, the collar will vibrate.
Direct Stimulation Level Settings
- The Bark Limiter has 7 levels of direct set stimulation levels used to correct barking. Direct set levels give the same amount of stimulation every time your dog barks no matter how many times he barks. To use direct set levels effectively, you need to test your dog over time and get a feeling for the level that he needs in most situations. The Bark Odometer can be very helpful when getting a feel for what level your dog will require when you are not around to watch him.
Bark Odometer
- The Bark Odometer counts the number of times your dog is corrected while wearing the collar, and counts them back to you when you turn the unit off. This way you know if the level that you have set for your dog is working for him while you are away. If you have no corrections or just a few, then your level is set high enough. If you have several corrections then you need to rethink the stimulation level that you are using. To activate the Odometer, set the dial to "N" which turns the unit off. The Odometer will then flash the number of corrections since the last time the unit was turned on.
Sleep Mode
- When your Bark Limiter is motionless for a short period of time it drops into Sleep Mode. This is designed to save battery power when the unit is not needed. The Bark Limiter can go into Sleep Mode when it is removed from your dog or while your dog is motionless. Sleep Mode allows you to leave your Bark Limiter dial set to the mode or level you need to control your dog's barking, even when the collar is not in use, without draining the battery.
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery
- The rechargeable Bark Limiter Deluxe is listed by Garmin as being able to go three months between charges. This will vary depending on what stimulation settings you use, how much your dog barks while wearing the collar, and how many hours a day your dog wears the collar. The collar can remain set to the desired mode or manual setting while recharging.
Battery Strength Indicator
- When you first turn the dial on the Bark Limiter from "N" to a level or setting, the light on the collar will glow for 5 seconds. The color of the light will tell you the condition of the battery. Green means "good," yellow means "charge," and red means "dead." The unit will work in yellow mode but immediate attention is recommended. The unit will not work at all when the light is red.
Coin Slot Dial
- The Bark Limiter has an external dial that is used to set the mode or stimulation level for the collar. Settings include:
N -- Off Position
V -- Vibration Mode
A -- Autorise
1-7 -- Direct Set Levels (1 is the lowest stimulation level, 7 is the strongest)
Integrated Contact Points
- Engineered to fit all dog breeds and all coat thicknesses.
Compact, Lightweight, and Waterproof -- weighs just over 2 oz.
Garmin Bark Limiter Deluxe Includes:
- Assemble all Poles -- Screw lower half of each pole into the upper half.
- Insert All Poles -- Insert each pole into one of the sewn pockets. Poles should go all the way into the pocket leaving material just above the crossbar. Be sure to insert all poles before placing your Blind.
- Install Blind in Ground -- Push each pole into ground in the desired location using your feet on the crossbars. Do not hammer crossbars. After each pole is secure move on to the next until all poles are set.
- Securing the Blind (OPTIONAL) -- In high wind situations you may want to secure the fabric to the poles. This may be done by wrapping a small bungee, zip tie, or cord around the post below the crossbars and then securing it to the fabric using the provided grommeted hole.
- Disassembly -- Reverse the above steps to disassemble the blind for transportation or storage if desired.
- Assemble all Poles -- Screw lower half of each pole into the upper half.
- Insert All Poles -- Insert each pole into one of the sewn pockets. Poles should go all the way into the pocket leaving material just above the crossbar. Be sure to insert all poles before placing your Blind.
- Install Blind in Ground -- Push each pole into ground in the desired location using your feet on the crossbars. Do not hammer crossbars. After each pole is secure move on to the next until all poles are set.
- Securing the Blind (OPTIONAL) -- In high wind situations you may want to secure the fabric to the poles. This may be done by wrapping a small bungee, zip tie, or cord around the post below the crossbars and then securing it to the fabric using the provided grommeted hole.
- Disassembly -- Reverse the above steps to disassemble the blind for transportation or storage if desired.
- Assemble all Poles -- Screw lower half of each pole into the upper half.
- Insert All Poles -- Insert each pole into one of the sewn pockets. Poles should go all the way into the pocket leaving material just above the crossbar. Be sure to insert all poles before placing your Blind.
- Install Blind in Ground -- Push each pole into ground in the desired location using your feet on the crossbars. Do not hammer crossbars. After each pole is secure move on to the next until all poles are set.
- Securing the Blind (OPTIONAL) -- In high wind situations you may want to secure the fabric to the poles. This may be done by wrapping a small bungee, zip tie, or cord around the post below the crossbars and then securing it to the fabric using the provided grommeted hole.
- Disassembly -- Reverse the above steps to disassemble the blind for transportation or storage if desired.
- Assemble all Poles -- Screw lower half of each pole into the upper half.
- Insert All Poles -- Insert each pole into one of the sewn pockets. Poles should go all the way into the pocket leaving material just above the crossbar. Be sure to insert all poles before placing your Blind.
- Install Blind in Ground -- Push each pole into ground in the desired location using your feet on the crossbars. Do not hammer crossbars. After each pole is secure move on to the next until all poles are set.
- Securing the Blind (OPTIONAL) -- In high wind situations you may want to secure the fabric to the poles. This may be done by wrapping a small bungee, zip tie, or cord around the post below the crossbars and then securing it to the fabric using the provided grommeted hole.
- Disassembly -- Reverse the above steps to disassemble the blind for transportation or storage if desired.
- Assemble all Poles -- Screw lower half of each pole into the upper half.
- Insert All Poles -- Insert each pole into one of the sewn pockets. Poles should go all the way into the pocket leaving material just above the crossbar. Be sure to insert all poles before placing your Blind.
- Install Blind in Ground -- Push each pole into ground in the desired location using your feet on the crossbars. Do not hammer crossbars. After each pole is secure move on to the next until all poles are set.
- Securing the Blind (OPTIONAL) -- In high wind situations you may want to secure the fabric to the poles. This may be done by wrapping a small bungee, zip tie, or cord around the post below the crossbars and then securing it to the fabric using the provided grommeted hole.
- Disassembly -- Reverse the above steps to disassemble the blind for transportation or storage if desired.
- Assemble all Poles -- Screw lower half of each pole into the upper half.
- Insert All Poles -- Insert each pole into one of the sewn pockets. Poles should go all the way into the pocket leaving material just above the crossbar. Be sure to insert all poles before placing your Blind.
- Install Blind in Ground -- Push each pole into ground in the desired location using your feet on the crossbars. Do not hammer crossbars. After each pole is secure move on to the next until all poles are set.
- Securing the Blind (OPTIONAL) -- In high wind situations you may want to secure the fabric to the poles. This may be done by wrapping a small bungee, zip tie, or cord around the post below the crossbars and then securing it to the fabric using the provided grommeted hole.
- Disassembly -- Reverse the above steps to disassemble the blind for transportation or storage if desired.
- Stake and chain are 100% stainless steel
- Brass snap
- Stake is approx. 24" long x 3/4" thick
- Chain is approx. 24" (allowing for approx 48" of movement)
- Introduction to Birds and Guns
- Electronic Collar Training and Basic Obedience
- Holding Point and Hunting in Range
- Advanced Training
George Hickox offers dog training schools for owners and their dogs across the country. For school dates and locations, and information visit their website www.georgehickox.com.]]>
George Hickox offers dog training schools for owners and their dogs across the country. For school dates and locations, and information visit their website www.georgehickox.com.- First, Robin walks you through the basic obedience commands showing what proper form looks like.
- Next, Robin shows how she introduces the e-collar to two of Steve's puppies, Jack & Tilly, and shows you how to find the right STIM level to communicate with your dog.
- She then turns that into a lesson for your dog to recognize that STIM means pay attention to your handler and expands that into a basic recall.
- Additional segments include teaching RECALL, PLACE, SIT, and HEEL.
Glucosamine (Size Matters) Your dog seems to be moving a little slower and you may have noticed a slight limp. Your Vet tells you your dog needs Glucosamine. So you buy it, but will it actually work? In some trials Glucosamine has been shown to be effective at easing joint discomfort and increasing flexibility while other trials show little to no benefit. So what is the truth? What is missing in nearly all of the studies is the actual method that the Glucosamine was prepared. I will attempt to shine some light on this much recommended amino sugar known as Glucosamine. Glucosamine for the most part comes from crustacean shellfish such as crabs, crayfish, lobster and shrimp. Glucosamine is an amino sugar that is utilized by the body to support healthy joint structures. It is unlike other sugars in that it is incorporated into the structure of tissues rather than being used as an energy source. Glucosamine is important for the formation and maintenance of your dog's nails, tendons, skin, eyes, bones, and heart valves. It also plays a role in the mucous secretion of the digestive, respiratory, and urinary tracts. Pharmaceutical grade Glucosamine is ideal for your athletic dog or those with arthritis or joint pain and is very beneficial as both a preventative measure as well as for helping to combat existing problems. Glucosamine absorbs and releases water with each step and thereby acts as a shock absorber for the joints offering long-term protection for current or retired athletes. Glucosamine stimulates the formation and repair of articular cartilage. Glucosamine forms the building blocks of vital compounds called mucopoly-saccharides, which are necessary for the construction and maintenance of virtually all connective tissue and lubricating fluid in the body, including tendons, ligaments, cartilage and synovial (joint) fluid. Method 1): The vast majority of the Glucosamine supplied for animals are processed through poorly effective methods of crushing and cutting. Crushing employs hammer-like tools to break the solid into smaller particles by means of impact. Cutting uses sharp blades to cut the rough solid pieces into smaller ones. These inexpensive processes leave the particles in such large pieces that the ability for an animal to break them down to a usable amino sugar is extremely difficult. It allows some manufacturers to place "Contains Glucosamine" on their packaging but the utilization is dismal at best. Method 2): Traditional micronization techniques are based on friction to reduce particle size. This method includes milling and grinding using cylindrical metallic drums that usually contain steel spheres. As the drum rotates the spheres inside collide with the particles of the solid, thus crushing them into smaller diameters. In the case of grinding, the solid particles are formed when the grinding units of the device rub against each other while particles of the solid are trapped in between. Method 3): Modern pharmaceutical methods use supercritical fluids in the micronization process. In this method supercritical fluid is used to dissolve the solid material under high pressure and temperature, forming a supercritical gas phase. The particles formed this way have a diameter of a few hundred nanometers. Studies show absorption rate of these particles are thousands of times better than those of crushing and hundreds of times better than grinding. The same process is true for any of you dog owners who are personally taking Glucosamine. Make sure you too are taking only the best. In summary, SIZE REALLY DOES MATTER. A Fisher Footnote: Many ask "Why do many products also add Chondroitin?" Answer: Along with Glucosamine, Chondroitin has become widely used for treatment of Osteoarthritis. Osteoarthritis is a type of arthritis characterized by the breakdown and eventual loss of cartilage, either due to injury or to normal wear and tear, and commonly occurs as dogs age. Chondroitin helps to keep cartilage healthy by absorbing fluid. Mendota Pet uses Bovine Trachea as an excellent source of Chondroitin. -- Tim Fisher, Founder / CEO, Retrieve Health]]>
|
|
| |||||
Sizes |
Width (in) |
Length (in) |
Sleeve (in) | ||
- Beginning
- 18 Weeks
- 12 months
George Hickox offers dog training schools for owners and their dogs across the country. For school dates and locations, and information visit their website www.georgehickox.com.]]>- Beginning
- 20 weeks of age
- One Year Old
George Hickox offers dog training schools for owners and their dogs across the country. For school dates and locations, and information visit their website www.georgehickox.com.]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
Click for larger image.
FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this collar, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number. Quick Release Adjustable Collar Embroidery Location:
Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this leash, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number.Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Smallest Size Only:
(prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement Larger Sizes:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 2-inches longer or 2-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
Click for larger image.
FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this collar, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number. Quick Release Adjustable Collar Embroidery Location:
Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>FREE Custom Embroidery
When you order this leash, you get custom embroidered text up to 28 characters in your choice of thread color. We recommend including your name and phone number.Enter your custom embroidery text in the blank above.
]]>COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
D-End Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 12", 14" and 16" Sizes: (prevents tag from covering any holes)
Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement 18" Size:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are COLLAR SIZE COLLARS which means you will need to add 4-5 inches to the dog's measured neck size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The collar size (CS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the end of the collar.
- Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
| |||||
Sizes |
Width (in) |
Length (in) |
Sleeve (in) | ||
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from one end of the strap to the other.
- With ID Plate, the collar fits roughly 17" to 23" necks.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Quick Release Adjustable Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
ITEM FEATURES:
Cato Board with Rubber Surface- Supports a 200 lb. human with minimal flexing, so it's easily strong enough for the largest dog
- Made from heavy-duty structural foam (not plastic) for exceptional durability
- Shatterproof -- will not crack or chip even in cold weather
- Rubber platform surface for traction
- No-flip design -- extra stable on uneven surfaces
- High grip rubber feet prevent sliding on hard surfaces
- Non-absorbant -- very easy to clean
- Stackable for easy moving and storage
- Weight: 6.5 lbs.
- Dimensions: 16"W x 24"L x 3.5"H
- Durable flat nylon webbing
- Bolt snap
- Resists water, mildew, and rot
- Hinge keeps pouch fully open, yet closes with a touch
- Sleek/sporty material that's water-resistant and resists stains and rips
- Dual inner pocket (to separate yummy from yummier treats)
- Belt clip and detachable belt (adjustable up to 51" in length)
- Carabiner clip
- Front storage pocket has easy-open flap to store your cell phone, poop bags, etc.
- Daisy chain elastic loops
- Dimensions: 8" x 7"
- Excellent training treats
- Roasted peanut flavor with crunchy texture
- Made in the USA
- Learn how to train your dog the PLACE command with pro trainer Robin MacFarlane
- Solve the problem of your dog being underfoot while you are:
- Trying to have dinner
- Working in the kitchen
- Hosting company
- Meeting someone at the door
- Stop being frustrated and end problem behaviors with pro trainer Robin MacFarlane
- Training segments include:
- Overview of basic commands
- Getting started
- Recall
- Place
- Sit
- Heel
Stronger Build: Upgraded PVC-coated galvanized steel cable and machine-crimped aluminum connectors for exceptional durability and longevity.
Better Performance: Thicker PVC coating, galvanized steel loop guides for added strength, and chrome-plated bronze stake loop rings for superior performance in the field.Other Features
shrink-wrapped connections eliminate sharp edges for added safety.
Versatile 20-Inch Leads: Longer cable leads with dual brass snaps adapt to various needs -- secure to the tie-out, a truck, or for short walks.
Specifications
Stronger Build: Upgraded PVC-coated galvanized steel cable and machine-crimped aluminum connectors for exceptional durability and longevity.
Better Performance: Thicker PVC coating, galvanized steel loop guides for added strength, and chrome-plated bronze stake loop rings for superior performance in the field.Other Features
shrink-wrapped connections eliminate sharp edges for added safety.
Versatile 20-Inch Leads: Longer cable leads with dual brass snaps adapt to various needs -- secure to the tie-out, a truck, or for short walks.
Specifications
Stronger Build: Upgraded PVC-coated galvanized steel cable and machine-crimped aluminum connectors for exceptional durability and longevity.
Better Performance: Thicker PVC coating, galvanized steel loop guides for added strength, and chrome-plated bronze stake loop rings for superior performance in the field.Other Features
shrink-wrapped connections eliminate sharp edges for added safety.
Versatile 20-Inch Leads: Longer cable leads with dual brass snaps adapt to various needs -- secure to the tie-out, a truck, or for short walks.
Specifications
Stronger Build: Upgraded PVC-coated galvanized steel cable and machine-crimped aluminum connectors for exceptional durability and longevity.
Better Performance: Thicker PVC coating, galvanized steel loop guides for added strength, and chrome-plated bronze stake loop rings for superior performance in the field.Other Features
shrink-wrapped connections eliminate sharp edges for added safety.
Versatile 20-Inch Leads: Longer cable leads with dual brass snaps adapt to various needs -- secure to the tie-out, a truck, or for short walks.
Specifications
Stronger Build: Upgraded PVC-coated galvanized steel cable and machine-crimped aluminum connectors for exceptional durability and longevity.
Better Performance: Thicker PVC coating, galvanized steel loop guides for added strength, and chrome-plated bronze stake loop rings for superior performance in the field.Other Features
shrink-wrapped connections eliminate sharp edges for added safety.
Versatile 20-Inch Leads: Longer cable leads with dual brass snaps adapt to various needs -- secure to the tie-out, a truck, or for short walks.
Specifications
Stronger Build: Upgraded PVC-coated galvanized steel cable and machine-crimped aluminum connectors for exceptional durability and longevity.
Better Performance: Thicker PVC coating, galvanized steel loop guides for added strength, and chrome-plated bronze stake loop rings for superior performance in the field.Other Features
shrink-wrapped connections eliminate sharp edges for added safety.
Versatile 20-Inch Leads: Longer cable leads with dual brass snaps adapt to various needs -- secure to the tie-out, a truck, or for short walks.
Specifications
- Contact Us by e-mail, phone, fax, snail mail
- Satisfaction guaranteed, returns, exchanges, damages
- Privacy, your personal information is protected by our privacy guarantee.
- Shipping info, free shipping, shipping methods, shipping rates, delivery time, express shipping
- Ordering, pay methods, how to order, paying by gift certificate
- Sales tax info
- Testimonials
- Careers at Gun Dog Supply
About the Snells & Gun Dog Supply
- Gun Dog Supply was founded in 1972 by Anne and Warner Snell, and is now run by their sons, Rob and Steve Snell.
- Call before you drive! Our shipping warehouse is located in Mathiston, Mississippi. Order pick up available 11am-3pm most business days 17645 U.S. Highway 82.
- Call 1-800-624-6378 or e-mail us. We appreciate your business! -- the Snell Family
Questions or Comments? Contact Gun Dog Supply by e-mail, phone, fax or mail
-
BY EMAIL -- We check e-mail every day and respond as fast as we can. You should have a reply within one business day.
- E-mail the Snells at sales@gundogsupply.com.
- If you have a question about your order, please make sure your e-mail includes your name and order number.
-
BY PHONE -- Call 1-800-624-6378 (USA).
- To dial direct call 1-662-615-5520.
- Phone hours are Monday - Thursday from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Friday from 8:00 am to 3:00 pm CENTRAL time. We observe daylight savings time.
BY FAX -- Fax orders or questions to 1-662-324-6011.
MAILING ADDRESS:
Gun Dog Supply
17645 U.S. Highway 82
Mathiston, MS 39752 USA
- Your satisfaction is guaranteed!
- Return any unsatisfactory item within 30 days of the invoice date for credit to your account, exchange, or adjustment.
- Regular shipping charges apply on all exchanges. Please see instructions for returning merchandise under "RETURNS" listed below.
- Have questions? Need help? Email us or call 1-800-624-6378.
Your Privacy is Protected
- Protecting your personal information / privacy is very, very important to us.
- We hate spam! Gun Dog Supply does NOT sell or rent our customers names, addresses or e-mail addresses to anyone.
- We send out e-mail notifications on products, special promotions, etc. from time to time.
- If you ever get e-mail or newsletters from us and you DO NOT want to continue receiving these messages, simply click the "Unsubscribe" link or reply with the word REMOVE in the subject line and we will remove your name from our e-mail lists.
Gun Dog Supply's Shipping Information & Ordering Information
Shipping Information
- We ship to all US addresses, including military addresses (APO, FPO) and US Territories. (some restrictions apply).
- We do not ship to any international destinations.
- Most orders ship out the next business day after being received.
- Orders with personalized dog collar I.D. plates may take longer. We will contact you by e-mail if we have any questions regarding your order, or if there will be a significant delay in processing your order.
- We use Federal Express (FedEx), United Parcel Service (UPS), and the US Postal Service (USPS) to ship to most addresses in the continental US.
- If you are unable to receive packages using any of these services please let us know in the COMMENTS field when you place your order.
- Shipments going to APOs, FPOs, and P.O. Boxes will be shipped via the US Postal Service regardless of the shipping option chosen.
FREE STANDARD SHIPPING (US48 only)- We pay the standard shipping cost on all orders of $89 or more to destinations within the continental United States (US48) excluding certain large or bulky items as noted.
- There is a $8.50 shipping charge on all orders under $89 shipped to destinations within the continental United States (US48).
- Orders shipping to AK, HI, APO, FPO, and US Territories will incur a shipping charge based on the total cost of items purchased:
- $49.99 and under -- $9.99
- $50.00 - $99.99 -- $14.99
- $100.00 - $149.99 -- $19.99
- $150 and over -- FREE STANDARD SHIPPING
- On Next Business Day and 2nd Business Day Air shipments we make all efforts to ship the same day you order.
- Orders received after 1:30pm CT may not ship until the next Business Day (M-F). Orders placed after 1:30pm Friday may not be processed until the following Monday. Orders placed on Saturday or Sunday should be processed on the following Monday.
- Saturday and Sunday are not considered business days and do not count as transit or delivery days. Next Day Saturday service is available in limited areas. Please call to check availability.
- Due to shipping restrictions some items may not be eligible for Express Shipping.
- We will contact you if any additional delays are necessary.
- FedEx and UPS Service Guarantees do not apply when transportation networks are disrupted due to conditions beyond their control, such as severe weather, natural disasters, or acts of terrorism / war.
- Please be sure you have provided DAYTIME contact information.
|
Service |
Shipping Time |
Average Cost |
|
Standard Shipping (US48) |
1-5 Business Days |
$8.50 |
|
2nd Business Day |
2 Business Days - All US48 Addresses |
$17.95 |
|
Next Business Day |
1 Business Day - All US48 Addresses - Saturday Delivery available for $20 additional to limited areas |
$44.95 |
|
AK, HI, APO, FPO, US Territories |
7+ Business Days |
$9.99 - $19.99 |
- All of our products are designed for use in the United States. It is your responsibility to use them in compliance with all local laws. Some restrictions may apply. Not all items can be shipped by all methods or to all addresses.
- DAMAGED shipments and/or packages which appear to be damaged should be refused at the time of delivery.
- Please email us or call us at 1-800-624-6378 in case of damaged or lost shipments.
- Return any unsatisfactory item within 30 days of the invoice date for credit to your account, exchange, or adjustment. After this date the manufacturer's warranty applies. Please insure all returned goods for the full retail price. We cannot be responsible for returned items that are lost in shipment. Returns should be shipped via FedEx, UPS, or insured Parcel Post to the address below. If you ship via the post office we recommend delivery confirmation with a signature required. If making an EXCHANGE, regular shipping charges will apply to the replacement item. Please note that we do not accept personal checks for payment.
- Returning Restricted Shipping Items:
Blanks, primers, poppers, launcher loads, and other items containing powder or similar materials cannot be shipped via the US Mail or by any Air Service. Please return these items using FedEx or UPS Ground.
Blank pistols cannot be shipped via US Mail. Please return these using FedEx or UPS.
Electronic items containing Lithium-Ion (Li-ion) batteries must have special labeling if shipped via US Mail.
Returns
Gun Dog Supply
17645 U.S. Highway 82
Mathiston, MS 39752 - With all returns, please include your name, shipping address, phone number, email address (if available), a copy of your invoice, and an explanation of what you want done with your return, e.g. refund your credit card, exchange for another item, etc.
- Need a Return Label Instructional Card?
Ordering from Gun Dog Supply
- Credit card orders are accepted online or by phone.
- We accept Visa, MasterCard, American Express (AMEX), and Discover.
- We accept PAYPAL.
- We DO NOT accept personal checks.
ORDERING OVER THE INTERNET:
- Ordering over the internet is safe, easy, and totally secure. When you order from Gun Dog Supply over the internet, you are connected to a secure server which protects your credit card and personal information.
- Internet Explorer, Chrome and Firefox users should see the LOCK (secure) symbol when you check out.
- Shortly after placing your order online, you will receive an e-mail confirmation of the order you entered online.
- Please note: free shipping on certain internet specials may NOT be shown on this confirmation, but WILL be reflected on your final invoice.
- Our phone hours are from 8:00 am - 5:00 pm Monday - Thursday, and 8:00 am - 3:00 pm Friday central time (except for major national holidays).
- Voice Mail messages are accepted 24 hours each day, seven days each week. Call 1-800-624-6378.
- Our fax number is 1-662-324-6011.
- When you order by mail, please be sure to include all item #'s and the full item name and price, as well as your name address, phone and e-mail (if available).
- Include $8.50 to cover standard shipping on all orders totaling less than $89 (US48 Only).
- Please note: we do not accept personal checks.
- Online orders need to include credit card account information so that the order can be processed online.
- Your credit / debit card will be charged the full amount of your order.
- A refund will be issued to your card for the amount of the gift certificate.
- NOTE: Refunds may take a few days to be processed and posted back to your card.
- If you prefer you may place your order by telephone to avoid this activity on your card.
- Internet orders please list club/chapter name, dollar amount, and the GDS-number under the "Comments" field.
- Phone orders? Please provide club/chapter name, dollar amount, and the GDS-number.
- Limit one gift certificate per customer, family, address, and/or transaction.
Gun Dog Supply
17645 U.S. Highway 82
Mathiston, MS 39752
Sales Tax Information
- Gun Dog Supply collects sales tax for the following states: Alabama, Arkansas, California, Colorado, Connecticut, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Idaho, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Maryland, Michigan, Minnesota, Mississippi, Nebraska, Nevada, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, North Dakota, Oklahoma, Pennsylvania, South Carolina, South Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, Washington, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
- Notice for Alabama customers: Gun Dog Supply collects the simplified sellers use tax on transaction(s) delivered into Alabama and the tax will be remitted on the customer's behalf to the Alabama Department of Revenue. Gun Dog Supply's program account number is SSU- R010272210.
Price Changes
- Prices in this catalog are subject to change without notice. Please e-mail us if you have any questions about prices.
Wholesale Sales
- Gun Dog Supply is not a wholesale distributor and we reserve the right to refuse service to any person or company we suspect of reselling products purchased from us.
TAKEAWAY: Save a lot of time and aggravation by starting with very simple training plan. AND Train the way you hunt so on opening day, your dog is confident and ready for anything.
Train the Way you Hunt TRANSCRIPT
Drew: Hi, I’m Drew Keeth with Honey Brake. I’m here today with Steve Snell from Gun Dog Supply and Joe Perron from Champion Retrievers. Steve is a new member of the Honey Brake Experience Team. We’d like to welcome him in here for this series of this season. Steve is from Gun Dog Supply out of Starkville, Mississippi. They have an unlimited supply of products for dogs. Check them out on the website. Today’s we’re going to talk about a training plan for your dog, when to start and how to start. Joe, you want to elaborate on that? Joe: What I like to do, Drew, is when we get them home at 49 days, is I like to get a little paint roller and throw it for them. All the gotta do is just go chase it. They don’t have to bring it back to you. Put them on a lead and walk them on a lead, teach them how to talk. They don’t have to walk at heel or anything, but just stay around where you are and get used to it. And then teach them to sit. And the way I teach them to sit is I’ll pick up on the lead and I’ll push their hiney down, and I’ll say sit at the same time. Get ‘em, let them walk around a little bit, repeat that. And just keep repeating it. In a few days he’ll be sitting whenever you tell him. Steve: Drew, most people train one way and they hunt another. It’s really important to incorporate everything that your dog is going to see in a hunting situation into your training. The first time a dog is in a duck blind, you don’t want it to be the first time he sees decoys, first time he sees a four wheeler, the first time he’s got three or four people around him firing shotguns. And so, you’ve got to incorporate all these things into the training to have a dog that’s ready to go. We’ve got all sorts of books and DVDs that can take you from a puppy all the way up to a fully trained retriever. Drew: The one thing we did with Honey this year, we got her around Christmastime and started her out taking her to the duck shed every morning and meeting everybody before daylight, and running around, and four wheelers, and trucks, and boats, and all that good stuff. Socialization, to me, is very, very key to successfully having a hunting retriever. This is your Honey Brake gun dog tip of the week.- Picking Your Dog
- Flushing
- Patterns
- Retrievers
- Socialization
- Pointers
- Wrap Up
Interior Dimensions: approx. 11 1/2"H x 16 1/2"W x 4"D]]>
Call: 1-800-624-6378
Guaranteed Satisfaction
We're here to help! -- Steve
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Center Ring Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get your choice of a FREE 4-line laser-engraved stainless steel or machine-stamped brass 2.75" x .75" I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit 4 lines of information:
- 20 characters on the top line
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement)
- 20 characters on the bottom line
- Allowed characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
COLLAR SIZING MADE EASY
These are NECK SIZE COLLARS which means the dog's measured neck size IS the collar size.Measure Your Dog's Neck to ensure a proper fit.
- Use a measuring tape, cloth tape, or a piece of string (and measure the string).
- Measure your dog's neck where you want the collar to rest on the neck AND at the appropriate tightness.
- Once you have a measurement, refer to the Guide below to find the appropriate size.
- The neck size (NS) represents the measurement from the center of the buckle to the fourth adjustment hole.
- You can adjust 1-inch longer or 3-inches shorter. Keep in mind that using the shorter adjustment holes will leave more collar strap extending past the buckle.
Click for larger image.
FREE Brass ID Name Plate
When you order this collar, you get a FREE 2.75" x .75" 3 or 4 line machine-stamped brass I.D. plate which we attach to your collar using rivets.
Standard Collar ID Plate Placement:
Enter your contact information in the blanks above.
- List multiple phone numbers
- Add name, city, state, and address if you have room
- Tags fit up to 4 lines of information.
- 20 characters on top line.
- 18 characters on the middle two lines (because of rivet placement).
- 20 characters on bottom line.
- NAME PLATES can use these characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 / - . , ' & @ $ # ( ) : ! " _ * + =
- Here's more on what info to put on your dog's ID plates